null  null
MOTOAMERICA AMA ROAD RACING SERIES FIM NORTH
AMERICA CHAMPIONSHIP REGULATIONS
This book (hereinafter collectively referred to as the
"Regulations") has been printed on 1.5.17. Successive
editions can be printed for supplementing and/or amending.
The new editions will be dated and issued to all relevant
Bodies.
THIS BOOK PREVAILS OVER ALL OTHER AMA AND FIM
NORTH AMERICA ROAD RACE RULE BOOKS.
MOTOAMERICA
3186 Airway Avenue Unit #D
Costa Mesa, California 92626
Tel: 714-242-5954
www.motoamerica.com
[email protected]
FIM NORTH AMERICA (FIMNA)
c/o American Motorcyclist Association
13515 Yarmouth Drive
Pickerington, Ohio 43147
Tel: 614-856-1900
Fax: 614-856-1924
fim-northamerica.com
[email protected]
AMERICAN MOTORCYCLIST ASSOCIATION (AMA)
13515 Yarmouth Drive
Pickerington, Ohio 43147
Tel: 614-856-1900
Fax: 614-856-1924
www.americanmotorcyclist.com
[email protected]
2017 EDITION – Version 7-27-2017
Page i of v
MOTOAMERICA AMA ROAD RACING SERIES FIM NORTH
AMERICA CHAMPIONSHIP
2017 Calendar
Thu-Sun, April 20-23
Fri-Sun, April 28-30
Fri-Sun, May 12-14
Fri-Sun, June 2-4
Fri-Sun, June 23-25
Fri-Sun, July 7-9
Fri-Sat, August 11-13
Fri-Sun, August 25-27
Fri-Sun, September 8-10
Fri-Sun, September 15-17
Page ii of v
AMENDMENTS TO THE MOTOAMERICA AMA ROAD
RACING REGULATIONS (HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY
REFERRED TO “REGULATIONS”).
The AMA, through the MotoAmerica Rules Commission and the
MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau, may at any time amend any or
all provisions of the Regulations.
Any subsequent changes that take place after the printed versions
are completed will be made electronically, and the on-line versions
would then be the prevailing versions.
The Permanent Bureau consists of:
1.
One Representative of the Krave Group LLC
2.
One Representative of MotoAmerica
3.
One Representative of FIM North America (FIMNA) or the
American Motorcyclist Association (AMA)
The Permanent Bureau shall meet on a regular basis to discuss
and decide on all issues pertinent to the respective interests of the
members.
The procedures for the calling of meetings of the Permanent
Bureau and for procedures during such meetings (which may be
held by telephone or other electronic means) and for the
appointment and/or vacancy of representatives and all procedures
for their deliberations shall be as mutually agreed by the members
from time to time provided always that a decision of the Permanent
Bureau shall only be effective with and upon the unanimous vote
of the members.
The MotoAmerica Rules Commission is competent to study any
proposal of changes to the MotoAmerica AMA Road Racing Series
Championship Regulations.
The MotoAmerica Rules Commission consists of:
1.
One Representative appointed by MotoAmerica who will be
the Chairman of the MotoAmerica Rules Commission
2.
One Representative appointed by FIM North America
(FIMNA) or the American Motorcyclist Association (AMA)
3.
One Representative KRAVE Group LLC
4.
One FIM Technical Representative
5.
One Participant Representative
Any resolution voted by the MotoAmerica Rules Commission
shall require the simple majority and the Chairman will have the
casting vote in case of a tie. The resolutions of the MotoAmerica
Rules Commission shall be effective subject to the approval of
the Permanent Bureau. The parties shall procure that the
meetings of the MotoAmerica Rules Commission take place no
later than fourteen (14) days following the request of any
Representative for that meeting.
Page iii of v
CONTENTS
GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS AND CONDITIONS
1. SPORTING REGULATIONS ……………………………….…1
2. TECHNICAL REGULATIONS …………………………........44
3. DISCIPLINARY AND ARBITRATION CODE ………….....188
4. CIRCUIT STANDARDS ……………………………………..199
5. MEDICAL CODE ……………………………………….……200
6. ANTI-DOPING CODE ……………………………………….212
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CODE …………………………………213
Page iv of v
GENERAL UNDERTAKINGS AND CONDITIONS
All riders, team personnel, officials, promoters/organizers and all the
persons involved in any capacity whatsoever participating in the
MotoAmerica AMA Road Racing Series, an FIM North America
Championship (hereinafter collectively referred to “Championship”)
undertake, on behalf of themselves, their employees, and agents, to
observe all the provisions of:
1.
SPORTING REGULATIONS
2.
TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
3.
DISCIPLINARY AND ARBITRATION CODE
4.
CIRCUIT STANDARDS
5.
MEDICAL CODE
6.
ANTIDOPING CODE
7.
FIM ENVIRONMENTAL CODE
These Regulations, Codes and Standards may be supplemented and
amended from time to time (hereinafter collectively referred to as the
"Regulations").
Any subsequent changes that take place after the printed versions are
completed will be made electronically, and the on-line versions would
then be the prevailing versions.
All the persons mentioned above may be penalized in accordance
with the provisions of the Regulations.
It is the responsibility of the team to ensure that all persons concerned
with its entry observe all the requirements of the Regulations. The
responsibility of the rider, or any other person having charge of an
entered motorcycle during any part of the Event with respect to
observance of the Regulations is joint and several with that of the
team.
All persons concerned in any way with an entered motorcycle or
present in any capacity whatsoever in the Paddock, Pits, Pit lane or
Track, must wear an appropriate pass at all times during the Event.
ANTI-DOPING CODE
All the persons concerned must at all times observe the US AntiDoping Agency Code and may be penalized accordingly.
Page v of v
SPORTING REGULATIONS
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
1.30
1.31
1.32
1.33
1.34
SPORTING REGULATIONS
INTRODUCTION
EVENTS
THE PADDOCK
OFFICIALS
MOTOAMERICA EVENT MANAGENT
MOTOAMERICA RACE DIRECTION
FIM NORTH AMERICA STEWARDS
THE CALENDAR
CLASSES
LICENSE REQUIREMENTS & ELIGIBILITY
ENTRIES
STARTING NUMBERS
SCHEDULE
TECHNICAL & MEDICAL CONTROL
INSTRUCTIONS & COMMUNICATIONS
FLAGS & LIGHTS
SAFETY CARS
PRACTICE & QUALIFYING
GRID POSITIONS
RACES
START PROCEDURE
RIDE THROUGH PROCEDURE
WET & DRY RACE PROCEDURES
BEHAVIOR DURING PRACTICE & RACE
PIT STOPS DURING RACES
RACE FINISH & RESULTS
INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
RE-STARTING A RACE
CHECK AREA
POINTS & CLASSIFICATION
DEPOSIT – MOTORCYCLE CONTROLS
DEPOSIT – FUEL CONTROLS
NON-PARTICIPATION IN AN EVENT
RULES UNDER CONSIDERATION - 2018
Page 1 of 213
2
2
2
3
4
6
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
11
12
15
15
20
21
22
28
29
32
35
35
36
37
39
40
42
42
42
42
1.0
SPORTING REGULATIONS
1.1
INTRODUCTION
A series of motorcycle races counting toward the
MotoAmerica AMA Road Race Series, an FIM North
America Championship for Riders and Manufacturers
will be organized.
1.2
EVENTS
a. The Event shall be deemed to commence at the
scheduled time for Technical and Sporting Checks
and finish after all the races at the expiry of the
deadline for the lodging of a protest and the time at
which technical or sporting verifications have been
concluded, whichever is the latest.
b. The race control must remain operative with all
equipment in place until the end of the period
provided for the lodging of a protest, and all officials
and marshals must remain at the circuit available to
the Race Direction and FIM North America Stewards
during that period.
c. Events must be staged on race circuits that have
been approved by the MotoAmerica, FIM North
America and the AMA.
d. Events must not include any other races except
for races approved by MotoAmerica, FIM North
America and the AMA.
e. Any activity involving 4 wheels racing vehicular use
of the track during the
event, including
"demonstrations", displays or other activity must
receive prior approval from AMA and MotoAmerica.
f. Organizers will be nominated by MotoAmerica and
the AMA.
g. The Organizer is responsible for providing the
facilities and personnel to ensure the smooth and
efficient running of the event.
h. MotoAmerica shall obtain or shall arrange for the
provision by each Organizer of an insurance for
third party liability for each meeting to cover
MotoAmerica liability and that of all participants, the
manufacturers, riders, sponsors, teams, service
companies and officials in case of accidents to
third parties during a meeting or during the practices.
1. The insurance policy shall also cover any possible
liability of FIM North America, the AMA and the
Organizer to third parties. A copy of the policy
shall be made available to the Organizer,
MotoAmerica and to the AMA not later than 20
days prior to the event.
2. The coverage provided for each event shall be a
minimum of US $5 million.
Page 2 of 213
3. The validity of the insurance will come into effect
three days before the first race and will terminate
one day after the last race day.
4. In case the Organizer subscribes his own Third
Party Liability Insurance in full conformity with the
above specification of the present art. 1.2.7, the
Organizer may send the certificate of insurance
duly filled in, signed and stamped by an authorized
Representative of the Insurance Company, to
MotoAmerica and to the AMA.
5. This original declaration (form to be provided by
MotoAmerica) shall be sent to the AMA by mail or
courier at least 20 days before the event.
i. At least 30 days prior to the Event, the Organizers of
the event must submit the following information to
the AMA and MotoAmerica:
1. The location at the circuit of the rider information
center and the official notice board.
2. The name and address of the company providing
the third party liability insurance coverage and
the number of the policy.
3. The name, address and telephone number of the
Circuit Medical Representative.
4. MotoAmerica
must
publish
the
above
information and Supplementary Regulations.
This information must be available to all teams
with an entry for the Event.
1.3
THE PADDOCK
a. The Paddock, pit boxes and all other facilities should
be available to teams at least on the Thursday
prior to a Sunday. Subject to the MotoAmerica
event schedule as notified in the Teams Handbook.
b. Access should be available for teams arriving to set
up between the hours of 08:00 and 20:30. Subject
to the MotoAmerica event schedule.
c. At all times that the Paddock is occupied there must
be 24 hour attendance at the gates providing
vehicular access to the circuit and paddock.
d. When the Paddock is occupied there must be an
adequate medical and fire- fighting service
available to all riders, teams, manufacturers,
sponsors, service companies, officials, AMA,
MotoAmerica, etc. At minimum the services must
be available from 08.00 – 18.00hrs on the day
prior to the “setting up of team’s day”, and from 1
hour before on track activity begins and two hours
after on track activity ceases during the event.
e. Full security must be supplied to the Paddock area
from at least midnight of the Thursday prior to a
Page 3 of 213
Sunday race until midnight of the Sunday following
the race.
1.4
OFFICIALS
a. All the following Officials must be present and
available at the time necessary to ensure smooth
and efficient running of the Event.
b. All communications between the individual Event
Officials must be made via the relevant Permanent
Officials.
1.4.1
Permanent Officials
All permanent officials shall be appointed for the
Championship by the Permanent Bureau.
The following officials will be appointed to perform
supervisory and executive roles. Except in cases of
illness or Force Majeure the officials will be expected
to be present at each event.
a. Race Director
The Race Director is responsible for:
1. Ensuring proper observance of the Regulations.
2. Communications
between
the
Event
Management Committee and the FIM North
America Stewards.
3. The control of practice and the race, adherence
to the timetable and, if he deems it necessary,
the making of any proposal to the Race
Direction to
modify the
timetable
in
accordance with the Sporting Regulations.
4. The stopping of practice or the race in
accordance with the Sporting Regulations if he
deems it unsafe to continue and ensuring that
the correct restart procedure is carried out.
5. The starting procedure.
6. The use of medical cars/fast interventions
vehicles.
7. Immediate approval and signature with time of
provisional results (practices, qualifying, warmups, starting grids and races) and presentation
of reports to the Event Management Committee.
b. MotoAmerica Rider Representative
The MotoAmerica Rider Representative is
responsible for assisting riders with clarifying and
interpreting sporting and technical regulations. He
accepts rider input regarding safety issues. He
accepts, evaluates and makes recommendations
regarding rider requested exceptions.
c. FIM North America Safety Officer
Page 4 of 213
The FIM North America Safety Officer is responsible
for the supervision of all aspects of safety.
d. Technical Director
The Technical Director is responsible for ensuring
that technical regulations are correctly enforced
and supervising scrutineering and protests of a
technical nature.
1.4.2
Individual event officials appointed by FIM North
America
All individual event officials shall be appointed for each
event.
a. FIM North America Chief Steward
The FIM North America Chief Steward (with
FIM Sporting Steward license) is responsible for
ensuring that the event is conducted according to
the Regulations.
b. FIM North America FMNR Steward
The FIM North America FMNR Steward (with
FIM Sporting Steward license) is appointed in
coordination with the host federation and is
responsible for ensuring that the event is
conducted according to the Regulations.
c. FIM North America Safety Officer
The FIM North America Safety Officer is appointed
in coordination with MotoAmerica and serves as
a permanent official. The FIM North America
Safety Officer is responsible for:
1. Ensuring that the circuit is suitably prepared
for and maintained during the Event and that
all legal requirements applicable for the running
of the event have been complied with.
2. Ensuring that all officials and services are in
place. The stationing of all track personnel and
equipment (i.e. marshals, fire-fighting services,
medical services, moto-taxi, recovery and
intervention vehicles, flags, etc.) alongside the
circuit no later than 30 minutes prior to all on
track activity.
3. The Race Director, the FIM North America Safety
Officer, the and the Medical Officer will make the
final inspection of the Circuit to ensure this
regulation is complied with, 30 minutes prior to
the beginning of the day’s first practice
sessions and/or warm up.
4. During the final inspection lap, the yellow flag must
be waved at each flag marshal post together with
the display of other flags and equipment
Page 5 of 213
requested by the FIM North America Safety
Officer.
1.4.3
Individual event officials appointed by the series or
organizer
a. Secretaries
Secretaries are responsible for providing secretarial
support for the Race Direction and the FIM North
America Stewards. They are also responsible for
effecting communications between various officials.
b. Other Officials, Marshals, Technical Scrutineers,
Security Personnel, Medical Staff etc., as required
for the efficient running of the event.
1.4.4
The Race Direction
The Race Direction shall be appointed for the
Championship by the Permanent Bureau.
1.4.5
The FIM North America Stewards
The FIM North America Stewards shall be appointed
for each event by FIM North America.
1.5
MOTOAMERICA EVENT MANAGEMENT
a. The management of the event will be carried out by
the MotoAmerica Event Management Committee
which will be comprised of the following delegates:
 The MotoAmerica Race Director - who will chair
the meetings
 Circuit Representative
 The Delegate appointed by MotoAmerica
 The MotoAmerica Technical Director
 The FIM North America Safety Officer
b. At any time, the duties of the members of the Event
Management Committee are:
 To ensure the smooth and efficient running of the
event.
 To make recommendations to the Race Direction
concerning any matter that is in contradiction to
the Regulations.
 To report to the Race Direction any infringements
of the Regulations.
c. The Event Management Committee will meet at any
time required during the event, but at least:
 Prior to the first practice session
 At the end of each practice day
 At the end of the event
d. The quorum for a meeting of the Event
Management Committee is three persons.
Page 6 of 213
e. All the Members have one vote. Decisions are
based on a simple majority. In the case of a tie,
then the MotoAmerica Race Director will exercise
a casting vote.
f. The Race Director may invite the participation of
Officials or other persons to assist in the meetings.
However, these invited persons will have no right
of vote.
g. The duties of the Event Management Committee
are:
 To receive reports from the various Officials
concerning scrutineering, practice and races.
 To make recommendations to the Organizer to
improve the smooth and efficient running of the
event.
1.6
MOTOAMERICA RACE DIRECTION
a. The Race Direction will comprise the following
persons:
 The Race Director (who will chair the meetings)
 The FIM North America Safety Officer
 The MotoAmerica Riders’ Representative
b. The quorum for a meeting of the Race Direction is
two persons.
c. Each member has one vote and decisions are
based on a simple majority.
d. The Race Direction will meet at any time required
during the event.
e. The duties of the Race Direction are:
1. To take decision as provided in the Regulations.
2. To impose penalties for any infringements of the
Regulations.
3. A change in the conduct and/or format of a race
and/or a practice session based on safety
considerations and provided that such decision
is absolutely necessary to resolve a situation
not foreseen in the Regulations. In such
exceptional cases, such decision may prevail
over specific provisions of the Regulations.
4. Provided that it is absolutely necessary to
resolve a situation not foreseen in the
Regulations, the Race Direction may issue
pre-race instructions or clarifications and in
specific cases even create pre-race regulations
(e.g. to take into account the local conditions at
a particular circuit). However, such actions may
only be taken within the limits set out by the
Regulations.
Page 7 of 213
5. To adjudicate on any protest relating
infringements of the Regulations.
1.7
to
FIM NORTH AMERICA STEWARDS
a. There will be a panel of two FIM North America
Stewards (with FIM Sporting Stewards license)
supervised by the Chief Steward who will chair
the meetings.
b. The FIM North America Stewards are responsible
for enforcing the Regulations. All Stewards
officiating at more than four events in any year
shall be approved by the Permanent Bureau.
c. The quorum for a meeting of the FIM North
America Stewards is two persons.
d. If the Chief Steward is indisposed during the
event, the second FIM North America Steward will
fill the vacancy.
e. The second FIM North America Steward may be
replaced by the FMNR steward or a selected FIM
Moto GP steward at events conducted in
conjunction with World Championship events.
f. Each member has one vote. Decisions are based
on a simple majority. In the case of a tie, the
Chairman will exercise a casting vote.
g. The FIM North America Stewards have no
executive role in the running of the events.
h. The FIM North America Stewards will meet at any
time required during the event.
i. The FIM North America Stewards are responsible
for:
1. Ensuring that the event is conducted according
to the Regulations and
reporting any
infringement to the Race Direction.
2. Adjudicating on any appeal against the decisions
of the Race Direction.
j. All decisions of the FIM North America Stewards
must be communicated in writing to the Race
Direction and all affected parties.
1.8
THE CALENDAR
a. The calendar of races counting for the
Championships will be, in principle, published by
no later than 31st October of the preceding year.
b. The MotoAmerica Rules Commission reserve the
right to amend the calendar or change the number
of races per event due to force majeure.
Page 8 of 213
1.9
CLASSES
Classes
Minimum License Req’d
Cylinders
following
Superbike
Superbike
categories:Cl
2, 3 or 4 cylinders
SSTKass
1000
Superbike
2, 3 or 4 cylinders
Supersport
Supersport or Superbike
2, 3 or 4 cylinders
SSTK 600
Superstock 600
2, 3 or 4 cylinders
KTM RC Cup SSTK Limited or SSTK 600 Single cylinder
Technical Regulations governing the five classes are
provided under Chapter 2 of the Regulations.
1.10
LICENSE
REQUIREMENT
COMPETITORS
AND
ELIGIBLE
a. United States riders must be in possession of a
license issued by the AMA, as defined in Article 1.9.
b. Non United States riders must be in possession of
an FIM International or FIM Continental Union
license and the appropriate start permission from
their
own FMN to include personal accident
insurance and repatriation. The AMA, MotoAmerica
or the organizer will not be held responsible for
repatriation.
c. Non United States riders may be issued an AMA
license if they provide a release from their own
federation and they meet the minimum
requirements.
License Type
Minimum Age Maximum Age
Superbike
18 years
50 years
Supersport
16 years
50 years
Superstock 600
16 years
50 years
Superstock Limited
14 years
22 years
d. The limit for the minimum age starts on the date of
the rider’s birthday.
e. A license may be issued up to the maximum age for
each license type and will be valid until the end of
the calendar year. An exception may be made on
an annual basis for riders above 50 years of age
whom will be required to provide evidence of
medical fitness.
Page 9 of 213
1.11
ENTRIES
a. The registration form and the entry fees are posted
on the website www.motoamerica.com.
1. Riders shall not take part in more than two
classes on the same day.
2. The withdrawal of entry from an event must
be communicated to MotoAmerica no later than
seven days before the event takes place. The
communication must be written and sent
through
e-mail
to
[email protected] Riders failing
to communicate this circumstance may be
penalized.
3. AMA and MotoAmerica have the right not to
accept or to reject an entry.
b. A compulsory rider/entrant briefing will be held for
all riders participating in the MotoAmerica AMA
Championship prior to the first official practice
session each event. An entrant or representative
may represent more than one rider.
1. An additional compulsory riders briefing may be
held for all ne w riders who will be participating
in the event.
2. Failure to attend the briefings in full may result
in disqualification from the event.
3. A waiver can be granted to a rider by Race
Direction.
c. A rider shall be deemed to have taken part in the
event when he participates in, at least, one practice
session.
d. A rider shall be deemed to have started a race
when he participates in, at least, the first lap of the
race.
1.12
STARTING NUMBERS
a. Each rider accepted for any class in the
MotoAmerica Series will be allocated a specific
starting number which will be valid for the entire
Championship. AMA and MotoAmerica reserve the
right to assign the number to a rider or team. In
general, the starting number will be based on the
results of the rider in the previous year's
Championship. Requests will be taken into
consideration.
b. The number one is reserved for the rider that
finished in the first place in the previous year
championship.
Page 10 of 213
1.13
SCHEDULE
The schedule for the event should be posted no later
than 30 days prior to the event.
1.14
TECHNICAL CONTROL AND MEDICAL CONTROL
a. All motorcycles should be checked by the
Technical Stewards prior to first participation in
practice on safety aspects, according to the
published schedule. At the discretion of the
Technical Director, machines and protective
clothing may be checked earlier than the schedule
if the machines are ready.
b. Teams may present for technical control one (1)
motorcycle per rider for all classes, which will be
specially identified by the technical controllers.
c. Unless a waiver is granted by the Race Direction,
teams who do not comply with the schedule for
technical or any medical controls will not be allowed
to take part in the event.
d. The procedure for technical control is described
in the Technical Regulations, articles 2.0 thru
2.13. The procedure for medical control and
doping control is described in the Medical Code.
1.15
INSTRUCTIONS
COMPETITORS
AND
COMMUNICATIONS
TO
a. Instructions may be given by the Race Director to
teams and/or riders by means of special circulars
in accordance with the regulations. Circulars must be
posted on the official notice board and available to
each team representative. Posting on the official
notice board and/or giving to the team
representative will be deemed as proof of delivery.
b. All classifications and results of practice and the
race, as well as all decisions issued by the officials,
must be posted on the official notice board. Posting
on the official notice board will be deemed as proof
of delivery and official publication.
c. Any official communication from the Race Direction
or the Permanent Officials to a team or rider must
be communicated in writing, by time keeping
monitors or radio. Similarly, any communication
from a team or rider to the Race Direction or the
Permanent Officials must also be made in writing.
d. MotoAmerica Race
Control
communicates
schedule, track, rider and motorcycle status
information on the frequency published in the
supplementary regulations and/or timing screens
throughout each race event. It is mandatory t hat
each team possess either a radio or scanner to
monitor MotoAmerica Race Control. Radios must
not be capable of broadcasting on the control
Page 11 of 213
frequency. Every team is required to bring an
example of their equipment to tech inspection
prior to the first on track activity and a once a
year log will be maintained to monitor rule
compliance. All teams must have at least one
crew member monitor this “listen only”
communications channel during all practice,
qualifying, and races. Teams must also monitor
timing screens similarly. Failure to comply may
result in a penalty or fine by Race Direction.
1.16
FLAGS AND LIGHTS
Marshals and other officials display flags or lights
to provide information and/or convey instructions to
the riders.
1.16.1
Flags and lights used to provide information:
a. Green Flag
The track is clear. This flag must be waved at each
flag marshal post for the first lap of each practice
session and of the warm up, for the sighting lap and
for the warm up lap. This flag must be shown waved
at the flag marshal post immediately after the
incident that necessitated the use of one or more
yellow flags. When the pit-lane exit is open, this flag
must be waved at the pit-lane exit.
b. Yellow and Red Striped Flag
The adhesion on this section of the track could be
affected by any reason other than rain. This flag
must be shown waved at the flag marshal post.
c. White Flag with diagonal red cross (stroke width of
the cross between 10 and 13 cm)
Indicates drops of rain on this section of the track.
This flag must be waved at the flag marshal post.
d. Yellow and Red Striped Flag together with the
White Flag with diagonal red cross
Indicates it is raining on this section of the track.
This flag must be waved at the flag marshal post.
e. White Flag
Indicates the final lap of a race, waved at the finish
line.
f. Checkered Black / White Flag
This flag will be waved at the finish line to indicate
the finish of race or practice session.
g. Checkered Black / White Flag and Blue Flag
The checkered black/white flag(s) will be waved
together with the blue flag at the finish line when a
Page 12 of 213
rider(s) precedes closely the leader during the final
lap before the finish line (see art. 1.26.1c).
h. Green Light
If used this light must be switched on at the pit lane
exit to signal the start of each practice session and
of the warm up, the start of the sighting lap(s)
and the start of the warm up lap.
1.16.2
Flags Which Convey Information and Instructions:
a. Yellow Flag
1. Waved at designated rows of the starting grid, this
flag indicates that the start of the race is delayed.
2. A standing yellow flag at the flag marshal post
indicates that there is a danger ahead beside the
track. Riders must exercise caution, overtaking is
forbidden up until the point where the green flag
is waved.
3. Waving yellow flag at the flag marshal post
indicates that there is a hazard wholly or partly
blocking the track, or other high risk situation. The
riders must slow down and be prepared to stop.
Overtaking is forbidden f ro m t he f i rs t
y e llo w f l ag up until the point where the green
flag is waved. Any Infringement of this rule during
a practice session will result in the cancellation
of the time of the lap during which the infraction
occurred.
4. In case of infringement of this rule during the
race, the rider must go back the number of
positions decided by the Race Direction. A board
will be displayed for the rider on the finish line
during a maximum of 5 laps. If the rider does not
go back after the board has been presented 5
times, he may be penalized by the Race Direction.
In both cases, further penalties (such as penalty
points, fine or suspension) may also be imposed.
5. If immediately after having overtaken, the rider
realizes that he made an infraction, he must raise
his hand and let past the rider(s) that he has
overtaken. In this case, no penalty will be
imposed.
6. During the final inspection lap, this flag must be
waved at the exact place where the flag marshal
will be positioned during the practices,
Superpole, warm ups and races.
b. Red Flag and Red Lights
1. When the practice or race is being interrupted,
the red flag will be waved at each flag marshal
post and the red lights around the track will be
switched on. Riders must return slowly to the pits.
Page 13 of 213
2. When the pit-lane exit is closed, this flag will be
waved at the pit lane exit and the light will be
switched on. Riders are not allowed to exit the
pit lane. Any infringement of this rule may be
penalized by Race Direction.
3. The red flag will be shown motionless on the
starting grid at the end of the warm up lap.
4. The red flag may also be used to close the track.
5. The red lights will be switched on at the start line
for between 2 and 5 seconds to start each race.
c. Blue Flag
1. Waved at the flag marshal post, this flag indicates
to a rider that he is about to be overtaken. During
the qualifying sessions, the rider concerned
must keep his line and slow down gradually to
allow the faster rider to pass him. During the race,
the rider concerned is about to be lapped. He
must allow the following rider(s) to pass him at
the earliest opportunity. Overtaking within a
group of lapped riders is forbidden under the
blue flag.
2. Any Infringement of this rule may be penalized by
Race Direction.
d. Black Flag
1. This flag is used to convey instructions to one rider
only and is waved at selected flag marshal post
together with the rider's number. The rider must
stop at the pits at the end of the current lap and
cannot restart when this flag results from a
penalty.
2. This flag can also be presented to a rider for a
reason other than a penalty (e.g. to rectify a nondangerous technical problem such as a
transponder problem).
3. Any infringement of this rule may be penalized by
Race Direction.
e. Black Flag with orange disk (40 cm)
1. This flag is used to convey instructions to one
rider only and is waved at selected flag marshal
posts together with the rider’s number. This flag
informs the rider that his motorcycle has
mechanical problems likely to endanger himself
or others, and that he must immediately leave the
track.
2. Any infringement of this rule may be penalized by
Race Direction.
Page 14 of 213
1.16.3
Flag Dimension
The flag dimension should be 80cms in the vertical
and 100cms in the horizontal. The flag dimension
will be checked the day preceding the day of the first
practice session.
1.16.4
Flag Marshals Posts
The location will be
homologation.
1.16.5
fixed
during
the
circuit
Marshals Uniforms
It is strongly recommended the marshals' uniforms to
be in white or orange and the rain coat to be
transparent.
1.17
SAFETY CARS
The safety cars should be equipped with flashing
lights.
1.18
PRACTICE AND QUALIFYING
1.18.1
Practice Restrictions
a. No practice or testing activity may take place at
a circuit hosting a championship event in the
thirty (30) days preceding the first official
practice day at that venue.
b. Practice Restriction Exceptions
Practice or testing exceptions to
restrictions listed above are as follows:
1. Official practice
MotoAmerica.
sessions
organized
the
by
2. Non-permanent riders are not subject to the
race event or practice restriction noted
above. A non-permanent rider is defined as: A
rider that is not a MotoAmerica season entrant.
In addition, the rider has not participated in more
than three (3) events (maximum of six (6) races)
at any time during the season. Should a rider
participate in additional events after taking
advantage of the non-permanent rider status as
it pertains to Section 1.18.1 he shall be subject to
penalties for each non-compliant occasion at the
discretion of Race Direction.
3. Any activity allowed by Race Direction.
4. Riders acting as coaches for an approved
school on a motorcycle of
different
displacement from their competition motorcycle,
and deemed to not be a competitive
advantage. Requests must be submitted in
writing prior to on track activity and approved
by the MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau.
Requests will not be approved at a circuit
Page 15 of 213
hosting a championship event in the seven (7)
days preceding the first official practice day
at that venue.
5. Teams may apply for exceptions in writing to
MotoAmerica, and the test must be open to all
persons with a current license.
6. Exceptions to this rule may be granted, with the
approval of the MotoAmerica Permanent
Bureau, due to reasons of force majeure. For
example, where a team recruits a qualified rider
to replace an injured rider, the qualified rider
could possibly have practiced unwittingly at a
circuit included in the Championships.
c. Riders found to be in violation may be fined,
subject to grid penalties and/or subject to
suspension from participation in part or whole of a
MotoAmerica Championship event. Riders who are
found to be in violation of this policy a second time
may be subject to a penalty as decided by race
direction or the MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau,
including but not limited to suspension for the
remainder of the season.
1.18.2
Race Restrictions
a. Participation in AMA-sanctioned race events
may take place at a circuit hosting a
championship event up to seven (7) days
preceding the first official practice day at that
venue. Participation in non AMA-sanctioned
race events may only take place up to thirty (30)
days preceding the first official practice day at
that venue. Endurance race participation is not
restricted.
Example: A MotoAmerica event is scheduled to
take place April 7/8/9, 2017. The first day of the
event is Friday April 7 th accordingly no AMAsanctioned race activity would be permitted
after 23:59 on Thursday March 30 th. Non AMAsanctioned activity would not be permitted after
23:59 on Wednesday March 8 th.
b. Riders found to be in violation may be fined,
subject to grid penalties and/or subject to
suspension from participation in part or whole of a
MotoAmerica Championship event. Riders who are
found to be in violation of this policy a second time
may be subject to a penalty as decided by race
direction or the MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau,
including but not limited to suspension for the
remainder of the season.
1.18.3
Practice Sessions
inclusive)
(Superpole
Page 16 of 213
and
warm-up
a. Practice sessions may be conducted as practice or
qualifying practice and in all cases are timed.
b. Except for Superbike and Superstock 1000,
competitors must participate in a minimum of
one practice session prior to the qualifying
session. Exceptions may be approved by Race
Direction due to extenuating circumstances.
c. Riders will commence practice from the pit lane
when the green light and/or the green flag is
displayed at the exit of the pit lane.
d. The duration of practice will commence from the
display of the green light and/or waving of the green
flag. A visible board or count-down will be shown
in the pit lane to indicate the minutes of practice
remaining.
e. The end of practice will be indicated by the waving
of a checkered flag, at which time the pit exit will
be closed. A rider's time will continue to be
recorded until he passes the official checkered flag
at the finish line after the allotted time has elapsed.
After the checkered flag riders may complete the
lap to the pit entry.
f. If practice is interrupted due to an incident or any
other reason, then a red flag will be displayed at
the start line and at all flag marshal’s posts. All
riders must return slowly to the pit lane. If practice
is restarted, the time remaining will be that shown
on the count-down device.
g. After practice has started, the condition of the racing
surface of the circuit should not be altered except on
instruction from the Race Director or the FIM North
America Safety Officer in response to a localized
change in conditions.
h. Refueling is allowed in the pit lane. Riders must
be off the bike during refueling. The ignition must
be off and the motorcycle must be on a rear stand
before refueling is permitted to start. A crew
member must be standing by with a fire
extinguisher with the pin pulled and the nozzle
aimed at the motorcycle. No electrical devices
such as battery chargers, fans, or tire warmers
may be plugged in during any refueling operations.
i. Warm up sessions are only available to riders
that have qualified for the race and will not be
used to qualify a rider for a race.
1.18.4
Motorcycle Use
a. During the event a rider may only use a motorcycle
that has been presented for technical control,
according to the procedures described in articles
2.4.10, 2.5.10, 2.6.10, 2.7.10 and 2.8.10 of the
Technical Regulations.
Page 17 of 213
b. Superbike and Superstock 1000 riders may use
the primary motorcycle presented for technical
control at any time during the event. Riders
are allowed one complete spare motorcycle.
Only one motorcycle may be presented for
preliminary technical checks and it will be the
only motorcycle allowed on the track and in the
pit box during the practices, qualifying,
Superpole and races. If the primary motorcycle
is declared unrepairable by the technical
director, the spare motorcycle may then be
presented for scrutineering before the next
session. For a full explanation of procedures
see article 2.4.10.
c. All other classes may only use the motorcycle
presented for technical control.
1.18.5
Lap Times
All laps for all sessions will be timed. A new lap record
for a circuit can only be established by a rider during a
race. Both for practice and for races, the lap time is
the subtraction of the time between two consecutive
crossings of the plane of the finish line indicated by the
line painted on the track.
1.18.6
Qualifying Results
The results will be based on the fastest time
recorded by the riders in qualifying practice,
qualifying and Superpole sessions. In the case where
all qualifying and Superpole sessions have been
cancelled, the results will be based on the fastest time
recorded by the riders in all practices. In the event of a
tie, riders’ second and subsequent best times will be
taken into account.
1.18.7
Qualification for the Race
1.18.7.1 KTM RC Cup
To qualify for the race, a rider must achieve a time at
least equal to 110% of the time recorded by the fastest
rider of his class. Any rider who fails to achieve a
qualifying time may be permitted to take part in the
race provided that in any of the free practice sessions
he has achieved a time at least equal to 110% of
the fastest rider in the same session, dependent on
space available as determined by race direction.
Provisional starts may be applied for and approved
by t h e Race Direction.
1.18.7.2 Superstock 600 Last Chance Qualifier (LCQ)
All Superstock 600 riders that do not qualify for the
Supersport / Superstock 600 Race from the 600
qualifying sessions will take part in the Superstock 600
Last Chance Qualifier if they achieve a time at least
equal to 110% of the time recorded by the fastest rider
in their qualifying session. The LCQ will be a
Page 18 of 213
minimum of 20 miles in length and will use the
Quick Start procedure. Any rider who fails to
achieve a qualifying time may be permitted to take
part in the LCQ provided that in any of the free
practice sessions he has achieved a time at least
equal to 110% of the fastest rider in the same
session, dependent on space available as
determined by race direction. Provisional starts may
be applied for and approved by t h e Race Direction.
1.18.7.3 Supersport and Superstock 600
a. Supersport Riders
To qualify for the Supersport/Superstock 600 Race,
a Supersport rider must achieve a time at least equal
to 107% of the time recorded by the fastest rider of
the 600 combined (Group 1 and Group 2)
qualifying sessions. Any rider who fails to achieve
a qualifying time may take part in the race i f he
has achieved a time at least equal to 107% of
the fastest rider in any of the combined (Group 1
and Group 2) practice sessions, dependent on
space available as determined by Race Direction.
Provisional starts may be applied for and m u s t
b e approved by Race Direction.
b. Superstock 600 Riders
1. To qualify for the Supersport/Superstock 600
Race, a Superstock 600 rider must achieve a
time at least equal to 107% of the time recorded
by the fastest Superstock 600 rider in the
combined (Group 1 and 2) qualifying
sessions or be ranked in the top 15 Superstock
600 riders of the 600 combined (Group 1 and 2)
qualifying sessions. The top 15 riders must
achieve a time at least equal to 110% of the time
recorded by the fastest rider of the 600 combined
(Group 1 and 2) qualifying sessions.
2. For double header rounds, all riders will be
automatically qualified for both races, as long as
they meet the provisions above.
3. The top 5 from the Superstock 600 Last Chance
Qualifier will be qualified for the Supersport /
Superstock 600 Race for that day, as long as they
achieve a time at least equal to 110% of the time
recorded by the fastest rider of the 600 combined
(Group 1 and 2) qualifying sessions.
4. Qualifying positions are dependent on space
available as determined by Race Direction.
5. Provisional starts may be applied for and must be
approved by Race Direction.
1.18.7.4 Superbike and Superstock 1000
a. To qualify for the Superbike/Superstock 1000
Race, a rider must achieve a time at least equal
to 107% of the time recorded by the fastest
Page 19 of 213
Superstock 1000 rider in the Qualifying Practice 1
(QP1) session or the Qualifying Practice 2 (QP2)
practice session.
b. Based on combined times from QP1 and QP2, the
twelve (12) fastest riders qualify for Superpole.
c. Any rider who fails to achieve a qualifying time
from QP1 or QP2 may be provided a
provisional start at the discretion of Race
Direction a n d permitted to take part in the
race provided that they have achieved a time at
least equal to 107% of the fastest Superstock
1000 rider in Practice Session 3.
d. Provisional starts may be applied for and must
be approved by t h e Race Direction.
e. Qualifying positions are dependent on space
available as determined by Race Direction.
f. Substitute riders, replacing a rider after the
event has started, are subject to the above
conditions.
g. If a substitute rider only participates from
practice session 3 onwards and does not
achieve a lap time of 107% of the fastest
Superstock 1000 rider then that rider may be
provided a provisional start at the discretion of
Race Direction.
1.19
GRID POSITIONS
a. The pole position, allocated to the fastest rider, will be
determined during the homologation of the circuit.
b. For all classes, the grid will be arranged in the
"in echelon" 3-3-3 configuration. Each line will be
offset. There will be a distance of approximately
9 meters between each row.
c. In the event of a tie, riders' second and subsequent
best times will be taken into account.
d. The final grid will be published after the warm up
session for that class has been completed.
1.19.3.1 Grid positions for KTM RC Cup
Grid positions will be based on the fastest time
recorded by the riders in all qualifying practices. In
the case where all qualifying practices have been
cancelled, the grid position will be based on the fastest
time recorded by the riders in all free practices.
1.19.3.2 Grid positions for Supersport and Superstock 600
Grid positions will be based on the fastest time
recorded by the riders in all qualifying practices. In
the case where all qualifying practices have been
cancelled, the grid position will be based on the fastest
time recorded by the riders in all free practices. In the
Page 20 of 213
event Race Direction determines a large disparity
of track conditions between the two groups in
qualifying or free practice, Group 1 riders will be
placed on the grid before Group 2 riders.
1.19.3.3 Grid positions for Superbike and Superstock 1000
Grid positions will be determined by the fastest lap time
recorded by each rider in the practice sessions and
Superpole sessions as follows:
a. The twelve riders in Superpole will be assigned
the first twelve (12) grid positions according to
their fastest lap time in Superpole.
b. If any riders that qualified for Superpole do not
record a lap time in Superpole they will be
classified as the last riders in Superpole
according to their combined lap times of the QP1
and QP2 sessions.
c. In the case where Superpole is cancelled, the
grid positions will be determined by the
combined fastest lap times recorded by the
riders of Superpole in the QP1 and QP2 sessions.
d. Any riders that did not qualify for Superpole but
qualified for the race will be assigned grid
positions behind all riders qualified for
Superpole according to their combined lap
times of the QP1 and QP2 sessions.
e. Any riders awarded a provisional start by Race
Direction due to achieving 107% of the fastest
Superstock 1000 rider in Practice Session 3 will
be assigned grid positions according to their
fastest lap times in Practice Session 3 after all
riders qualifying for the race through the normal
process.
1.20
RACES
a. Race Classes
Class
Min Distance Max Distance
Distance
Superbike (SSTK1000)
40 miles
60 miles
Supersport
35 miles
55 miles
Superstock 600
30 miles
50 miles
Superstock Limited
20 miles
40 miles
b. Race distance will be determined by the AMA
and MotoAmerica after publication of the calendar.
Races declared wet may be reduced by a
certain number of laps (at the discretion of Race
Direction).
Page 21 of 213
c. The length of a race may only be varied by Race
Direction.
d. A visible countdown board will be shown at the
finish line to indicate the number of remaining laps
in the race.
1.21
START PROCEDURE
1.21.1
Normal start procedure
a. Only riders who have completed at least one
sighting lap and started the warm up lap from the
grid will be permitted to start the race from their
position published on the final grid. Under no
circumstances may they push their motorcycle onto
the grid from the pit lane.
b. Approximately 15 minutes before the start of all
races.
1. Pit lane exit opens for sighting lap.
2. Green lights on and/or green flags waved at
the pit lane exit. Count-down boards of 5, 4, 3,
2 and 1 minutes are shown at the pit exit.
Riders may complete more than one sighting lap
by passing through the pit lane where they may
make adjustments or refuel.
c. 10 minutes before the start of all races pit lane
exit closes. Red lights on and/or red flag waved at
the pit lane exit.
d. Riders who do not go on to the grid may start the
warm up lap from the pit lane under the instructions
of the marshal positioned at the pit lane exit.
Riders starting the warm up lap from the pit lane
must start the race from the back of the grid.
e. When riders reach the grid after the sighting lap(s)
they must take up their positions and may be
attended by up to five persons one of whom may
hold an umbrella. All riders must remove helmets,
except in the case of a restarted or wet race.
Officials may display panels or cones, at the side
of the track, indicating the row of the grid, to assist
riders in locating their grid position.
f. Following participation in the sighting lap, if a rider
does not join the grid due to mechanical issues or
otherwise, they may elect to repair their motorcycle.
Machine changes or repairs can only be made
in the pit lane. Under no circumstances may they
push their motorcycle onto the grid from the pit
lane or ride counter course to proceed to the
grid. In this case, riders must start the warm up lap
from pit exit and start the race from the back of the
grid.
Page 22 of 213
g. The Race Dir ect or may, at this stage, choose to
declare the race as "wet" or "dry" and the starter will
indicate this to the riders on the grid and those who
may still be in the pit lane by the display of a
board. If no board is displayed the race will
automatically be "dry".
h. Riders on the grid may, at this stage, make
adjustments to the motorcycle or change tire to suit
the track conditions. Trolleys are allowed on the grid.
Two air blowers are allowed on the grid. Tire
warmers may be used on the grid. Riders may use a
generator to power tire warmers and air blowers on
the grid.
1. Only one generator per motorcycle may be used.
The generator must be of the "hand carried" type
and have a maximum output capacity of two
kilowatts. The noise limit of the generator is 65
dB/A.
2. Starter engines may also be used on the grid.
3. Generators and starter engines should be
located to the rear of the motorcycles.
i. All adjustments must be completed by the display of
the 3 minute board. After this board is displayed,
riders who still wish to make adjustments must
push their motorcycle to the pit lane where
accessible. Such riders and their motorcycles must
be clear of the grid and in the pit lane before the
display of the 1 Minute Board, where they may
continue to make adjustments. Such riders will start
the warm up lap from the pit lane and may start the
race from the back of the grid. Working on the
machine on the grid after the 3 Minute Board is
presented may result in a penalty.
j. Refueling or changing fuel tank on the grid is
forbidden.
k. 5 minutes before the start of the warm up lap
display of 5 Minute Board on the grid.
l. 3 minutes before the start of the warm up lap
1. Display of 3 Minute Board on the grid.
2. Generators must be disconnected and
removed from the grid as quickly as possible.
Trolleys and air blowers must be removed from
the grid as quickly as possible.
3. Immediate removal of
motorcycles on the grid.
tire
warmers
from
4. All persons except two mechanics per motorcycle,
the person holding the umbrella for the rider, the
television crew of the host broadcaster and
essential officials must leave the grid.
Page 23 of 213
5. Riders must put their helmets on.
6. No person (except essential officials) is allowed
to go on the grid at this point.
m. 1 minute before the start of the warm up lap
display of 1 Minute Board on the grid. All team
personal except the mechanics will leave the grid.
The mechanics will, as quickly as possible, assist
the rider to start the machine and will then vacate
the grid.
n. 30 Seconds before the start of the warm up lap
display of 30 Second Board on the grid.
All riders must be in position on the grid with engines
running. No further assistance from mechanics is
permitted. Any rider who is unable to start his
motorcycle must remove it to the pit lane where
accessible, under the control of the grid marshals,
where he may take further attempts to start it. Such
riders may start the warm up lap from the pit lane
and must start the race from the back of the grid.
o. Approximately two minutes before the start of the
race
1. Green flag waved to start warm up lap.
2. In the interest of safety, should a rider stall his
motorcycle, he may be assisted to restart. If, after
a reasonable period, the engine does not start,
then the rider will be pushed into the pit lane,
where accessible, so his mechanics may
provide assistance.
3. The riders will make one lap, at unrestricted
speed, followed by a safety car. The safety car
will overtake slow riders.
4. As soon as the riders have passed the pit lane
exit, the pit lane exit light will be turned green,
and any rider waiting in the pit lane will be
permitted to join the warm up lap. Thirty seconds
later the pit lane is closed and a marshal will
display a red flag and/or red light.
p. On returning to the grid the riders must take up
their positions with the front wheel of their
motorcycle up to or behind the front line and between
the side lines defining the grid position and keep
their engines running. If two or more riders must
start from the back of the grid, they will take up
position in the order in which they qualified for the
race. An official will stand at the front of the grid
holding a red flag motionless. Any rider who arrives
after the safety car has taken up its position at the
back of the grid, must enter the pit lane, proceed to
pit out, unless directed otherwise, and will start the
race from there.
Page 24 of 213
1. Any rider who encounters a problem with his
motorcycle on the warm up lap may return to the
pit lane and make repairs in the pit lane not in the
garage.
2. Any rider who stalls his engine on the grid or who
has other difficulties must remain on the
motorcycle and raise an arm. It is not permitted
to attempt to delay the start by any other means.
3. As each row of the grid is completed, the officials
will lower the panels indicating that their row is
complete. Panels will not be lowered when a rider
in that row has indicated that he has stalled his
motorcycle or has other difficulties. When all
panels have been lowered an official at the rear
of the grid will wave a green flag. The Starter will
then instruct the official at the front of the grid,
dis playing the red flag, to walk to the side of the
track.
q. A red light will be displayed for between 2 and 5
seconds. The red light will go out to start the race.
If the red lights' device is fed by normal power
(electricity) supply, it should also be connected to a
U.P.S. (Uninterruptable Power System) to provide
power to the starting lights' device in the event the
primary electric power fails at the moment of the
start.
r. Any rider who anticipates the start or who is
deliberately not placed in his starting box will be
required to carry out the Ride Through Procedure
described in article 1.22.
1. Anticipation of the start (jump start) is defined by
the motorcycle moving forward when the red
lights are on. Race Direction will be the sole judge
of whether an advantage has been gained and
decide if a penalty will be imposed and must
arrange for the Team to be informed of such
penalty as soon as possible. A board may also
be displayed in the pit lane indicating the same.
The notification of a jump start on the timing
monitor is one of “fact”.
2. If, after the start of the race, a rider stalls his
motorcycle, then he may be assisted by being
pushed along the track until the engine starts.
If, after a reasonable period, the engine does not
start, then the rider will, where accessible, be
pushed into the pit lane where his mechanics
may provide assistance.
s. After the start signal has been given and the last
rider has passed the pit exit, the pit exit will be
opened. Any riders still in the pit lane may then
start the race up until the point when the lead rider
has crossed the finish line to complete the first
racing lap.
Page 25 of 213
t. Should there be a problem that might prejudice
safety for the start of the warm up lap or the race
the Starter will invoke either the Start Delayed
Procedure or the Extended Start Delayed
Procedure.
1.21.2
Start Delayed Procedure
a. A red flag is waved from the Starter’s rostrum and
the red light stays on.
1. The "Start Delayed" board is displayed from the
Starter’s rostrum and marshals will wave a
yellow flag at designated rows of the starting
grid.
2. Riders must stay in their grid position with
helmets on, engines may be switched off.
3. If a machine caused the start delay it will be
removed to the pit lane, where accessible,
regardless of what work is needed to restart the
machine. If it can be restarted the rider may
start the warm up lap from pit lane, and will start
the race from the back of the grid.
4. Only essential officials may be allowed on the
grid, no media, guests, umbrella-holders or
other team personnel will be permitted, with the
exception of camera crew(s) authorized by the
Organizers.
b. The start procedure will be re-commenced by a
board displayed as soon as possible (normally
as soon as all riders on the grid).
c. If the 5 Minute Board or 3 Minute Board is
displayed, riders may be attended by a
maximum of 2 mechanics per rider. Only tire
warmers, stands, and hand-carried tools are
allowed, no generators are allowed on the grid. The
start procedure will re-commence as described
in section 1.21.1l.
d. If the 1 Minute Board is displayed, riders may be
attended by a maximum of 2 mechanics per
rider to assist the rider with starting the
machine as quickly as possible and then
immediately vacate the grid. The start
procedure will re-commence as described in
section 1.21.1m.
e. If the 30 Second Board is displayed, riders may
not be attended by mechanics. Any rider who is
unable to start his machine must remove it to the
pit lane, where accessible, under the control of
the grid marshals so he may make further attempts
to start it. Such riders may start the warm up lap
from the pit lane and will start the race from the
Page 26 of 213
back of the grid. The start procedure will recommence as described in section 1.21.1n.
f. Green flag waved to start warm up lap. In the
interest of safety, should a rider stall his machine,
he may be assisted to restart. If, after a reasonable
period, the engine does not start, then the rider,
where accessible, be pushed into the pit lane where
his mechanics may provide assistance.
g. The race distance will be reduced by one lap if the
Start Delayed signal is after the warm up lap only.
Any person who, due to his behavior on the grid
is responsible for a “start delayed” may be further
penalized.
1.21.3
Extended Start Delayed Procedure
a. A red flag is waved from the Starter’s rostrum and
the red light stays on.
b. The "Start Delayed" board is displayed from the
Starter’s rostrum and marshals will wave a yellow
flag at designated rows of the starting grid.
c. Engines must be switched off.
d. After display of the Start Delayed, a maximum of 2
mechanics per rider are allowed on the grid to
assist riders in removing their bike to the pit area.
e. Refueling is allowed in the pit lane. Riders must
be off the bike during refueling. The ignition must
be off and the motorcycle must be on a rear stand
before refueling is permitted to start. A crew
member must be standing by with a fire
extinguisher with the pin pulled and the nozzle
aimed at the motorcycle. No electrical devices such
as battery chargers, fans, or tire warmers may be
plugged in during any re-fueling operations.
1.21.4
Restart Procedure (Quick Start)
Superstock 600 LCQ races will follow the quick start
procedure beginning at 1.21.4c
When a race is stopped, riders must return to the pit
lane, unless otherwise instructed b y officials. If t he
race is to be re-started, mino r repairs may b e ca rrie d
out. The following procedure will take place:
a. Upon arrival in the pit lane, riders may make
adjustments to their motorcycle, refueling is
permitted in the pit lane. (Prior to the start of
the race, teams should ensure that all necessary
equipment is located in the pit lane service area
in a safe position).
b. When all riders have entered the pit lane the Race
Director will announce the time remaining to the reopening of the pit lane and the race distance.
Page 27 of 213
1. The duration between the announcement and the
actual opening of the pit exit will be a minimum
of 5 minutes.
2. The time remaining to the opening of the pit exit
will be displayed on timing screens and on the
starting grid countdown clock.
3. The rider should avail himself of his new
grid position from the classification displayed
on the timing screen or from officials.
c. When the time period has elapsed, the pit lane
exit will be opened for SIXTY SECONDS. Riders
will make one lap at unrestricted speed to the
starting grid, followed by a Safety Car. Any
rider delaying the progress of the sighting lap will
be overtaken by the Safety Car. Any rider arriving
behind the Safety Car must go into the pit lane. Such
riders will have to start the warm-up lap from the pit
lane.
d. All riders will arrive back on the starting grid,
and stop, with engines running, no adjustments
may be made. Any rider encountering difficulties
on the sighting lap must enter the pit lane.
e. Upon arrival back at the starting grid each rider
may be directed to their grid position by ONE
mechanic only (without tools) and the normal
start procedure will be followed from 1.21.1 (n) as
described above with the start signal given in the
normal manner.
1.21.5
Accelerated Start Procedure
The start procedure may be accelerated by the Race
Direction. This will be notified to teams on the timing
monitor and by the display of the boards indicating
the time remaining to the closure of the pit lane exit
and to the start of the warm-up lap. This will be used
in principle when there are time restraints due to
television coverage or the circuit has limitations on
time.
1.22
RIDE THROUGH PROCEDURE
a. During the race, the rider will be requested to ride
through the pit lane, stopping is not permitted. He
may then rejoin the race.
b. The rider must respect the speed limit (Art. 1.24.n) in
the pit lane. In case of infraction of this speed limit,
the ride through procedure will be repeated; in case
of a second infraction of this speed limit, the rider
will be shown the black flag and will be disqualified.
c. In the case of a race interrupted prior to the penalty
being complied with, and if there is a second part,
the rider will be required to ride through after the
start of the second part of the race.
Page 28 of 213
d. In the case of a rider carrying forward a penalty
for anticipation of the start, into the second part of
an interrupted race and subsequently found to have
anticipated the second start, the rider will be
shown the black flag and will be disqualified.
e. A yellow board (100cm horizontal X 80 cm vertical)
displaying the rider's number (black color) will be
shown at the finish line and the information will also
be displayed on the time keeping monitors.
f. Failure by the relevant rider to ride through,
having been shown the board 5 times, will result
in that rider being shown the black flag.
g. In the case where the organization has been unable
to carry out the ride through penalty before the
end of the race, the relevant rider will be inflicted
with a time penalty of 20 seconds.
1.23
“WET" AND "DRY" RACES
All races will be categorized as either wet or dry. A
board may be displayed on the grid to indicate the
status of the race. If no board is displayed, the race
is automatically dry. The purpose of this classification
is to indicate to riders the consequence of varying
climatic conditions during a race.
1.23.1
Dry Races
A race classified as dry will be interrupted by the
Race Director, if he considers that climatic
conditions affecting the surface of the track makes it
likely that riders will wish to change tires.
1.23.2
Wet Races
a. A race classified as wet, usually commenced in
varying or wet conditions, will not be interrupted
for climatic reasons except for extraordinary events
and riders who wish to change tires or make
adjustment must enter the pits and do so during the
actual race.
b. In all cases where the first race is stopped for
climatic reasons, then the restart will,
automatically, be a "wet" race.
1.23.3
Wet Sighting Laps
1.23.3.1 SCENARIO A – Wet Sighting Laps (Prior to the starting
procedure)
a. If all the official practices, the race day warm-up
(and any previous races for the class during the
event) are dry and the race is declared Wet, prior to
the starting procedure.
b. A time and duration for "Wet Sighting Laps" will be
published. The duration may be specified as a time
or number of laps.
Page 29 of 213
1. Display of boards from 5 Minutes, counting down
to the start of Wet Sighting Laps.
2. Pit lane exit open - start of Wet Sighting Laps.
3. Riders must pass through the pit lane to make
multiple laps.
c. At the end of the Wet Sighting Laps period the pit
lane exit will be closed and riders should complete
their current lap stopping on the starting grid. Any
rider still in the pit lane after the pit lane exit has
closed must start the warm up lap from pit lane exit
and the race from the back of the grid. Under no
circumstances may they push their motorcycle onto
the grid from the pit lane.
d. A normal countdown to the start of the warm up lap
will be commenced. There will be a minimum
period of 5 minutes between the closing of the pit
lane exit and the display of the 5 Minutes board on
the grid.
e. Any further work on the grid must be completed by
the display of the 3 Minute board.
f. The race distance may be reduced accordingly.
g. To give riders more information about when the pit
lane exit closes, a marshal will be positioned at the
pit lane entrance for the duration of the start
procedure with the following boards:
• “1” (to indicate that the pit lane exit will be closed
within 1 minute).
• “0” - (to indicate that the pit lane exit is closed).
h. Fuel may be added in the pit lane with the following
restrictions:
1. Riders must be off the bike.
2. The ignition must be off and the motorcycle
must be on a rear stand before fuel is added.
3. A crew member must be standing by with a fire
extinguisher with the pin pulled and the nozzle
aimed at the motorcycle.
4. No electrical devices such as battery chargers,
fans, or tire warmers may be in use.
1.23.3.2 SCENARIO B – Wet Sighting Laps (After pit exit
closed prior to warm up lap)
a. If all the official practices, the race day warm-up
(and any previous races for the class during the
event) are dry and the Race is declared Wet, during
the starting procedure, after the pit lane exit has
closed, and before the start of the warm up lap.
Page 30 of 213
b. A time and duration for "Wet Sighting Laps" will be
published. The duration may be specified as a time
or number of laps.
1. Display of boards from 5 Minutes, counting down
to the start of Wet Sighting Laps.
2. Tires may be changed on the grid.
3. All work must be completed by, and all
mechanics must have vacated the grid by the
display of the 30 SECONDS board.
4. Display of Green Flag from the starter’s rostrum
- start of Wet Sighting Laps from the grid.
5. Once the riders have departed from the starting
grid mechanics may return.
6. Riders must pass through the pit lane to make
multiple laps according to the time remaining. As
a minimum procedure it will be one pass through
the pit lane.
c. At the end of the Wet Sighting Laps period the pit
lane exit will be closed and riders should complete
their current lap stopping on the starting grid. Any
rider still in the pit lane after the pit lane exit has
closed must start the warm up lap from pit lane exit.
d. A normal countdown to the start of the warm up laps
will be commenced. There will be a minimum
period of 5 minutes between the closing of the pit
lane exit and the display of the 5 Minutes board on
the grid.
e. Any further work on the grid must be completed by
the display of the 3 Minute board.
f. The race distance may be reduced accordingly.
g. To give riders more information about when the pit
lane exit closes, a marshal will be positioned at the
pit lane entrance for the duration of the start
procedure with the following boards:
• “1” (to indicate that the pit lane exit will be closed
within 1 minute).
• “0” - (to indicate that the pit lane exit is closed).
h. Fuel may be added in the pit lane with the following
restrictions:
1. Riders must be off the bike.
2. The ignition must be off and the motorcycle
must be on a rear stand before fuel is added.
3. A crew member must be standing by with a fire
extinguisher with the pin pulled and the nozzle
aimed at the motorcycle.
Page 31 of 213
4. No electrical devices such as battery chargers,
fans, or tire warmers may be in use.
1.24
BEHAVIOR DURING PRACTICE AND RACE
a. Riders must obey the flag signals, the light signals,
and the boards which convey instructions. Any
infringement to this rule may be penalized
according to the provisions of article 1.24b.
b. Riders must ride in a responsible manner which
does not cause danger to other competitors or
participants, either on the track or in the pit-lane.
Any infringement of this rule may be penalized with
one of the following penalties:
 fine
 drop of position(s)
 ride through
 time penalty
 drop of any number of grid positions at the rider’s
next race
 disqualification
 withdrawal of Championship points
 suspension or any other penalty at the discretion
of Race Direction
c. Riders must not tour the track. Touring is defined as
riding in a manner not compatible with general
safety. This includes being on the racing line and
not attempting to produce a fast lap time. A penalty
may be imposed on any rider found to be touring. If
marshals report that a rider is touring and this is
collaborated by video or comparing consecutive
sector times, then automatic penalties will apply as
follows:
1. During practice, qualifying or Superpole:
 First offence: official warning
 Second offence: fastest qualifying session
time disallowed
 Third offence and subsequent offenses: next
fastest qualifying session times disallowed in
sequence
2. During a race:
 exclusion
 ride-through
 time penalty and/or fine, depending on the
circumstances
3. Persistent acts of touring will be deemed more
serious and will be penalized accordingly.
Page 32 of 213
d. Riders should use only the track and the pit lane.
However, if a rider accidentally leaves the track
then he may rejoin it at the place indicated by the
officials or at a place which does not provide an
advantage to him. Any infringement of this rule
during the practices or warm up will be penalized
by the cancellation of the lap time concerned and
during the race, by a drop of position(s) decided by
the Race Direction. A board will be displayed for the
rider on the finish line during a maximum of 5 laps.
If the rider did not go back after the board has been
presented 5 times, he will be penalized at the
discretion of the Race Direction.
e. Any Repairs or adjustments along the race track
must be made by the rider working alone with
absolutely no outside assistance. The marshals
may assist the rider to the extent of helping him to lift
the motorcycle and holding it whilst any repairs or
adjustments are made. The marshal may then
assist him to re-start the motorcycle.
f. If the rider intends to retire, then he must park his
motorcycle in a safe area as indicated by the
marshals.
g. If the rider encounters a problem with the
motorcycle which will result in his retirement from
the practice or the race, then he should not attempt
to tour at reduced speed to the pits but should pull
off the track and park his motorcycle in a safe place
as indicated by the marshals.
h. Riders who are returning slowly to the pits for
remedial work should ensure that they travel as
far as possible off the racing line.
i. Riders who stop their engines in the pits may be
assisted to re-start their motorcycle by the
mechanics.
j. Riders are not allowed to transport another person
on their motorcycle or to be transported by
another rider on his motorcycle (exception:
Another rider or by another rider after the checkered
flag or red flag).
k. Riders must not ride or push their motorcycles in
the opposite direction of the circuit, either on the
track or in the pit lane, unless doing so under the
direction of an Official.
l. No signal of any kind may pass between a moving
motorcycle and the rider’s team, or anyone
connected with the motorcycle’s team, entrant or
rider, except for the signals of the timekeeping
transponder, lap trigger, GPS, legible messages
on a pit board, or body movements by the rider or
team. Onboard TV camera signals are allowed, but
Page 33 of 213
only when such signals are for the purposes of and
managed by the Championship promoter.
m. Riders may be required to carry "on-board" cameras
on their motorcycle. The cameras and associated
equipment must be carried during all practice
sessions and the race.
1. Riders required to carry “on-board” cameras
will receive an adjustment to the minimum
weight equal to the weight of the camera and any
mounting equipment.
2. Teams must give reasonable access and
assistance to the company designated for the
supply of the camera equipment to facilitate the
mounting of the equipment.
3. The video recorded on the cameras is the sole
property of MotoAmerica and must not be
downloaded or copied.
n. A speed limit of 60 km/h (approximately 37 mph) will
be enforced in the pit lane at all times during the
event. Riders must respect the speed limit from
where the sign 60 km/h is placed up to where the
sign 60 Km/h crossed out is placed.
1. Any rider found to have exceeded the limit during
the practice will be subject to a fine of 150 USD.
2. Any rider who exceeds the pit lane speed limit
during a race will be penalized with a ride
through.
3. The Race Direction must communicate the
offence to the pit of the rider after having
received the information from the Official in
charge.
o. Stopping on the track during practices and races is
forbidden.
p. Practice Starts
1. During the practice sessions, Superpole and warm
ups, practice starts are permitted.
2. When it is safe to do so, at the pit lane exit before
joining the track.
3. After passing the checkered flag at the end
of practice sessions, Superpole and warm-ups
when it is safe to do so, off the racing line and
only in the designated Practice Start Zone(s)
and following the procedure, as communicated
to teams prior to the first practice session.
4. Any rider found to have infringed this rule may be
subject to an instant fine of 150 USD. Further
penalties may be applied.
Page 34 of 213
q. If the winning rider wishes to parade a flag, he
must ride to the side of the racing surface to collect
the flag and then rejoin the circuit when it is safe to
do so.
r. After the checkered flag, riders riding on the track
must wear a safety helmet until they stop on the pit
lane / parc fermé.
s. It is not permitted to ride racing motorcycles within
the circuit other than in the pit lane or on the track.
t. Any rider or team whose motorcycle spills oil
on the track causing interruption of practice,
qualifying, warm up or race may be penalized with
one of the following penalties:
 fine
 disqualification
 withdrawal of Championship points
 suspension or any other penalty at the discretion
of Race Direction
u. Any rider who enters the paddock during a race
will be considered to have finished the race and
may NOT re-enter the race.
v. All riders and team members must conduct himself
or herself at all times in an appropriate, morally
correct manner and in a manner to advance the
positive goodwill and image of the AMA, FIM North
America and MotoAmerica.
w. All riders and team members must follow policies
and procedures presented in the Teams Handbook
and Entrant Agreement.
1.25
PIT STOPS DURING A RACE
a. Riders may enter the pit lane (but must not cross the
line into the rider’s paddock area) during the race.
b. Refueling is strictly prohibited. Any infringement of
this rule will be penalized with a disqualification.
c. Any rider who enters the paddock, the garage or
cold side of the pit lane will be considered to have
finished the race and may not re-enter the race or
take part in any re-started race.
1.26
FINISH OF A RACE AND RACE RESULTS
a. When the leading rider has completed the
designated number of laps for the race, he will be
shown a checkered flag by an official standing at
the finish line, behind a first line of protection. The
checkered flag will continue to be displayed to the
subsequent riders.
Page 35 of 213
1. When the checkered flag is shown to the leading
rider, no other rider will be permitted to enter the
track from the pit lane.
2. As soon as the checkered flag is shown to the
leading rider, the red light will be switched on at
the pit lane exit and a marshal showing a red
flag will stand in the pit lane exit.
3. If a rider(s) closely precedes the leader during the
final lap before the finish line, the official will show
to the rider(s) and to the leader simultaneously the
checkered flag and the blue flag. That means that
the race is finished for the leader while the rider(s)
closely preceding the leader has (have) to
complete the final lap and take the checkered
flag.
b. In case of a photo-finish between two, or more,
riders, the decision shall be taken in favor of the
competitor whose front wheel leading edge crosses
the plane of the finish line first. In case of ties,
the riders concerned will be ranked in the order of
the best lap time made during the race.
c. The results will be based on the order in which the
riders cross the line and the number of laps
completed.
d. To be counted as a finisher in the race and be
included in the results a rider must:
 Complete 75% of the race distance.
 Cross the finish line on the race track (not in
the pit lane) within five minutes of the race
winner. The rider must be in contact with his
motorcycle.
e. The riders classified in the first three positions in
the race will be escorted by officials, as quickly as
possible, to the podium for the awards ceremony. A
second podium awards ceremony will be
provided for the first three positions from the
Superstock 1000 and the Superstock 600 class
participants after each associated race.
Participation in the podium ceremony by these
riders is compulsory.
1.27
INTERRUPTION OF A RACE
1.27.1
If the Race Direction decides to interrupt a race,
then red flags will be displayed at the finish line
and at all marshals' posts and the red lights will be
switched on around the circuit. Riders must
immediately slow down and return to the pit lane.
a. Any rider who enters the paddock, the garage or
cold side of the pit lane will be considered to have
finished the race and may not re-enter the race.
Page 36 of 213
b. The results will be the results taken at the last point
where the leader and all other riders on the same
lap as the leader had completed a full lap without
the red flag being displayed.
c. Exception: if the race is interrupted after the
checkered flag, the following procedure will apply:
1. For all the riders to whom the checkered flag
was shown before the interruption, a partial
classification will be established at the end of the
last lap of the race.
2. For all the riders to whom the checkered flag was
not shown before the interruption, a partial
classification will be established at the end of the
penultimate lap of the race.
3. The complete classification will be established by
combining both partial classifications as per the
lap/time procedure.
4. In the case of 1.28.4 at the time the red flag is
displayed, riders who are not actively competing in
the race will not be classified. This includes riders
that have crashed, experienced a mechanical
failure, are on the pit lane or previously retired from
the race.
If the results calculated show that less than three
laps have been completed by the leader of the race
and by all other riders on the same lap as the leader,
then the race will be null and void and a new race will
be run according to the article 1.28. If it is found
impossible to re-start the race, then it will be declared
cancelled and the race will not count for the
Championship.
1.27.2
If three laps have been completed by the leader of
the race and all other riders on the same lap as the
leader, but less than two-thirds of the original race
distance, rounded down to the nearest whole
number of laps, then the race will be re-started
according to article 1.28. If it is found impossible to restart the race, then the results will count and half
points will be awarded in the Championship.
1.27.3
If the results calculated show that two-thirds of the
race distance rounded down to the nearest whole
number of laps have been completed by the leader
of the race and by all other riders on the same lap as
the leader, then the race will be deemed to have
been completed and full Championship points will be
awarded.
1.28
RE-STARTING A
INTERRUPTED
1.28.1
If a race has to be re-started, then it will be done
as quickly as possible, consistent with track
conditions allowing. As soon as the riders have
Page 37 of 213
RACE
THAT
HAS
BEEN
returned to the pits, the Race Director will announce a
time to begin, which, conditions permitting, should
not be later than 10 minutes after the initial display
of the red flag.
1.28.2
The results of the first race must be available to
teams before the second part of a race can be started.
1.28.3
The Race Director will decide and announce whether
the Normal Start procedure (1.21.1) or the Quick Start
Procedure (1.21.4) will be used.
1.28.4
Conditions for the re-started race will be as follows:
a. In the case of situation described in 1.27.1 (less
than t hree laps completed) above:
1. All riders may re-start.
2. Motorcycles may be repaired and refueling is
permitted.
3. Tire changes are not permitted unless the Race
Director announces a change to the race status
(i.e. Dry/Wet), or the Technical Director
authorizes an exceptional tire change due to a
verifiable technical problem. In the case of an
exceptional tire change, the rider must start the
restarted race from the back of the grid.
4. The number of laps will be at the discretion
of Race Direction respecting schedules with
a minimum of two-thirds of the original race
distance rounded down to the nearest whole
number of laps.
5. The grid positions will be as for the original race.
b. In the case of the situation described in 1.27.2
(three laps or more and less than two-thirds
completed) above:
1. Only riders who are classified as finishers
(completed 75% of the first race distance) in the
first race may re-start.
2. Any rider who has crashed in the first part of the
race who is eligible to take part in the re-start
must be determined fit by a Medical Officer if
there is suspicion that an injury has been
sustained. The Race Director’s decision is final in
requiring any rider undertake a check to ascertain
fitness to ride.
3. Motorcycles may be repaired, and cleared by a
Technical Official.
4. Refueling is permitted.
5. Tire changes are not permitted unless the Race
Director announces a change to the race status
(i.e. Dry/Wet), or the Technical Director
authorizes an exceptional tire change due to a
Page 38 of 213
verifiable technical problem. In the case of an
exceptional tire change, the rider must start the
restarted race from the back of the grid.
6. The number of laps of the second race will be the
number of laps required to complete two-thirds of
the original race distance rounded down to the
nearest whole number of laps with a minimum of
one–third of the original race distance rounded
up. The decision is at the discretion of Race
Direction respecting schedules.
7. The grid position will be based on the finishing
order of the first race.
8. The final race classification will be established
according to the position and the number of
laps of each rider at the time he crossed the
finish line at the end of the last part of the race.
Provisions of Art. 1.26.4 will apply.
1.28.5
Should a re-started race be interrupted and Race
Direction deems it possible to re-start, then the
conditions for a further re-start will follow Art. 1.28.4,
with the race distance and results defined as follows:
a. If the re-started race is interrupted when 1/3 race
distance or more has been completed, the race will
be deemed to have been completed and full
Championship points awarded. The
race
classification will be according to Art. 1.28.4.
b. If the re-started race is interrupted when less than
1/3 race distance has been completed, the race
would be re-started a further time if possible, for
the same number of laps as the first re-start.
c. If that further re-started race (third race) is interrupted
when less than 1/3 race distance has been
completed, Race Direction will determine if it is
practical to re-start the race and will define the
number of laps to be completed. If it is not
possible to re-schedule the race the race results
will then be determined by the first part of the
race and full Championship points awarded,
provided that in the first part of the race 1/3 race
distance or more had been completed.
d. If the first race is re-started and none of the races
(original or subsequent re-starts) have completed
1/3 race distance or more, then the race is
deemed to be cancelled and no Championship
points will be awarded.
e. Race Direction may reschedule re-started races in
the race program as necessary.
1.29
CHECK AREA
a. At the end of the race, or the final part of a race that
has been interrupted, all the classified motorcycles
Page 39 of 213
will be directed to a compulsory check area (parc
fermé) pending inspection by the Technical
Stewards or potential protests. It is the
responsibility of the teams and riders to ensure
that the machine is in the parc fermé. Motorcycles
will normally be released from the parc fermé 30
minutes after the finish of the race.
b. For all races the top three classified finishers will
be held at the podium area, the remaining
machines will be directed to the parc fermé. This
includes the Superstock 1000 race that is conducted
in conjunction with the Superbike races.
c. Following race one of a double header that takes
place on the same day, the remaining riders will
return to their pit areas where the tire stickers will
be inspected by the MotoAmerica Technical Director
or his appointed staff, once confirmed correct the
teams will be allowed to remove the wheels from
the machines. Data can be downloaded from the
data logger. No other work may be carried out
until the time for a Technical protest notification
has expired (15 minutes after the end of Race 1)
(see art 3.4.5). Machine must remain fully visible
during this period.
d. Should a team have a Technical Protest lodged
against them after Race 1 (in a same day double
header event) then they have three options:
1. Immediate examination time allowing.
2. Replacement of suspected parts, with the
replaced parts impounded for examination later.
3. Checking of all seals, use the machine ‘as is’
in Race 2 and for any infractions found then
penalties will be applied to BOTH races.
1.30
CHAMPIONSHIP POINTS AND CLASSIFICATION
a. Riders and Constructors will compete for the FIM
North America MotoAmerica AMA Road Racing
Championship.
a. For riders, the points will be those awarded to
finishers in each race.
b. For Constructors, only the highest placed
motorcycle of a Constructor will gain points,
according to the position in the race.
c. All races will count for the FIM North Am e r ic a
MotoAmerica AMA Road Racing Championship
classification.
d. In the event of a tie in the number of points, the final
positions will be decided on the basis of the number
of best results in the races (number of first places,
number of second places etc.). In the event that
Page 40 of 213
there is still a tie then, the date in the
Championships at which the highest place was
achieved will be
taken into account with
precedence going to the latest result.
e. In the case where a rider participates on different
motorcycles, it is the make of the motorcycle with
which he obtained the most points that will appear
next to his name in the final classification, without,
however, modifying the
calculation for the
Constructors' classification.
f. The Champions in each category are obliged to
attend an official awards ceremony.
1.30.4
Championship Points
a. Superbike class championship points awarded for
the combined Superbike and Superstock 1000 Race
will be awarded based on the finishing position listed
on the scale below, irrespective of class.
b. Supersport class championship points awarded for
the combined Supersport and Superstock 600 Race
will be awarded based on the finishing position listed
on the scale below, irrespective of class.
c. Superstock 1000 championship points for the
combined Superbike and Superstock 1000 Race will
be awarded based on the finishing position listed on
the scale below, for the Superstock 1000 class only.
d. Superstock 600 championship points for the
combined Supersport and Superstock 600 Race will
be awarded based on the finishing position listed on
the scale below, for the Superstock 600 class only.
e. KTM RC Cup championship points will be awarded
on the finishing position listed on the scale below.
Position
Points
1st
25 points
2nd
20 points
3rd
16 points
4th
13 points
5th
11 points
6th
10 points
7th
9 points
8th
8 points
9th
7 points
10th
6 points
11th
5 points
12th
4 points
Page 41 of 213
1.31
13th
3 points
14th
2 points
15th
1 point
DEPOSITS IN CASE OF MOTORCYCLE CONTROL
FOLLOWING A PROTEST
a. The deposit in case of dismantling and
reassembling a motorcycle to measure the
cylinder capacity, following a protest, is 200 USD
(material included). The deposit in case of
partial or complete dismantling of an engine or
gearbox is 350 USD.
b. If the party who makes the protest is the losing
party, the deposit shall be paid to the winning party.
c. If the party who makes the protest is the winning
party, the deposit shall be reimbursed.
1.32
DEPOSITS FOR FUEL CONTROLS FOLLOWING A
PROTEST
a. All requests for fuel control following a protest
or an appeal must be accompanied by a deposit
of 750 USD paid to FIM North America.
b. After the last control:
 the winning party will have its deposit reimbursed.
 the losing party will have to pay the costs of all
the controls carried out after deduction of
deposits which it has already paid.
1.33
NON-PARTICIPATION IN AN EVENT
a. Any rider who enters an event must inform
the Organizer if, subsequently, he decides not to
participate in the event. A rider who has submitted
an entry form and fails to participate and fails to
inform seven days prior to the event will be
reported by the Event Management Committee
to FIM NORTH AMERICA, who may impose a fine
of up to 500 USD.
b. Upon receipt of the Event Management
Committee report, FIM North America will send a
letter to the rider or the rider’s FMN asking the
reasons for the non-participation; a reply should be
sent within 15 days at the latest and a decision will
be taken regarding the penalty.
c. A suspension could also be pronounced against a
rider who takes part in another event on the same
day.
1.34
RULES UNDER CONSIDERATION FOR 2018
.16.4
Flag Color (Under consideration for 2018)
Page 42 of 213
The pantones for the color are as follows:
• Orange: Pantone 151C
• Black: Pantone Black C
• Blue: Pantone 298C
• Red: Pantone 186C
• Yellow: Pantone Yellow C
• Green: Pantone 348C
.16.5
Riders' number board (Under consideration for 2018)
Black board (70 cm horizontal X 50 cm vertical)
which enables the race number of a rider to be
attached with a set of numbers in white, whose stroke
width is minimum 4 cm and height minimum 30 cm.
This board must be available at each flag marshal
post.
1.20.2
Superbike and Superstock 1000
consideration for 2018)
races
(Under
A race will not be interrupted for climatic reasons
except for extraordinary events and riders who wish
to change motorcycles, change tires or make
adjustments must enter the pits and do so during the
actual race.
1.22
PIT STOPS during a Race (Under consideration for
2018)
c. For the Superbike and Superstock 1000 class only:
(Under consideration for 2018)
1. Riders who wish to change tires in the pit lane
must stop in front of their pit area and turn off
the engine.
2. The use of power tools (maximum two at the
same time, electric or pneumatic) is allowed.
3. Stands or lifts must operate manually and cannot
be power assisted.
4. The use of an auxiliary starter and/or of a booster
battery is allowed to restart the motorcycle.
5. A marshal will monitor the situation and report
any infringement of this rule which will be
penalized by the Race Direction with a ride
through.
6. Intervention time for a pit stop for tire(s) change is
fixed to 30 seconds plus the necessary time to
cross pit lane from entrance to exit (set time).
This intervention will be monitored by the Official
timekeeping company. Any rider whose pit
stop is below the set time will be penalized
by the Race Direction with a 10 second plus the
time under the intervention time penalty.
Page 43 of 213
7. During the pit stop, adjustments to the motorcycle
are allowed.
8. Pit stops without a tire change will not be subject
to this rule.
Page 44 of 213
TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
INTRODUCTION
CLASSES
GENERAL
SUPERBIKE TECH REGULATIONS
SUPERSPORT TECH REGULATIONS
SSTK 1000 TECH REGULATIONS
SSTK 600 TECH REGULATIONS
KTM RC CUP TECH REGULATIONS
FUEL, OIL AND COOLANTS
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING & HELMETS
TECHNICAL CONTROL PROCEDURES
TECH VERIFICATION PROCEDURES
SOUND LEVEL CONTROL
APPROVED NUMBER FONTS
HOMOLOGATION
Page 45 of 213
45
45
45
45
50
83
108
133
155
170
174
176
180
184
186
187
2.0
TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
Amendments to the technical regulations may be
made by the MotoAmerica Commission at any time.
During practices: If a motorcycle is found not to be in
conformity with the technical regulations during or
after the practices, its rider will be given a penalty for
the event such as a ride-through, a drop of any number
of grid positions for the next race, suspension and/or
withdrawal of Championship or Cup points.
After a Race: If a motorcycle is found not to be in
conformity with the technical regulations after a race,
its rider will be given a penalty such as a time penalty,
or disqualification.
2.1
INTRODUCTION
Motorcycles for the MotoAmerica Superbike
Championships must be motorcycles with a valid road
homologation in one of the following areas: USA, EU
or Japan.
These motorcycles must be available for sale to the
public in the shops and the dealerships representing
the manufacturer in at least one of the above areas
before the third event of the current Championship to
be allowed to be used in the remaining Championship
events.
2.2
CLASSES
2.2.1.
The production based racing classes will be
designated by engine capacity and level of technical
freedom.
2.3
GENERAL ITEMS
2.3.1
Materials
The use of titanium in the construction of the frame,
the front forks, the handlebars, the swing arms, the
swing arm spindles and the wheel spindles is
forbidden. For wheel spindles, the use of light alloys is
also forbidden. The use of titanium alloy nuts and bolts
is allowed.
a. Titanium test to be performed on the track:
Magnetic test (titanium is not magnetic).
b. The 3 % nitric acid test (titanium does not react. If
metal is steel, the drop will leave a black spot).
c. Specific weight of titanium alloys is between 4.5 and
5.0 kg/dm³ vs. over 7.48 kg/dm³ of steel and can be
ascertained by weighing the part and measuring its
volume in a calibrated glass filled with water (intake
valve, rocker, connecting rod, etc).
d. In case of doubt, the test must take place at a
Materials Testing Laboratory.
Page 46 of 213
2.3.2
Handlebars
a. Exposed handlebar ends must be plugged with a
solid material or rubber covered.
b. The minimum angle of rotation of the steering on
each side of the center line or mid position must be
of 15° for all motorcycles.
c. Whatever the position of the handlebars, the front
wheel, tire and the mudguard must maintain a
minimum gap of 10 mm.
d. Solid stops, (other than steering dampers) must be
fitted to ensure a minimum clearance of 30 mm
between the handlebar with levers and the tank,
frame or other bodywork when on full lock to prevent
trapping the rider's fingers.
e. Repair by welding of light alloy handlebars is
prohibited.
f. Composite handlebars are not allowed in any class.
2.3.3
Control levers
a. All handlebar levers (clutch, brake, etc.) must be
ball ended (diameter of this ball to be at least 16
mm). This ball can also be flattened, but in any case
the edges must be rounded (minimum thickness of
this flattened part 14 mm). These ends must be
permanently fixed and form an integral part of the
lever.
b. Each control lever (hand and foot levers) must be
mounted on an independent pivot.
c. The brake lever, if pivoted on the footrest axis, must
work under all circumstances, such as the footrest
being bent or deformed.
2.3.4
Wheel and rims
a. Any modification to the rim or spokes of an integral
wheel (cast, molded, riveted) as supplied by the
manufacturer or of a traditional detachable rim other
than for spokes, valve or security bolts is prohibited,
except for tire retention screws sometimes used to
prevent tire movement relative to the rim. If the rim
is modified for these purposes bolts, screws etc.,
must be fitted.
b. The distance between the rim walls is measured
inside the flange walls in accordance with ETRTO.
2.3.5
Tires
a. Tires may be replaced from those fitted to the
homologated motorcycle.
b. The tread pattern must be made exclusively by the
manufacturer when producing the tire.
Page 47 of 213
c. As a safe minimum, the depth of the tire tread over
the whole pattern at pre-race control must be at
least 2.5 mm.
d. Tires which at the preliminary examination have a
tread depth of less than 1.5 mm are considered as
non-treaded tires and the restrictions applying to
slick tires will then apply to them.
e. The surface of a slick tire must contain three or
more hollows at 120° intervals or less, indicating the
limit of wear on the center and muster areas of the
tire. The rider shall not enter the track if at least 2 of
these indicator hollows are worn on different parts
of the periphery.
2.3.6
The use of tire warmers is allowed.
2.3.7
Use of tires
a. The competitors shall only use tires distributed by
the Official Supplier during the event.
b. For each event, all tires must be made of the same
quality and shall be strictly identical.
c. All tires to be used must be easily identifiable with a
color marking or a numerical system, to be applied
by the Official Supplier at the time of manufacturing.
d. The Official Supplier shall provide the Technical
Director with a written description of the markings
and the general characteristics of the different types
of tires.
e. The Technical Director may ask the Official Supplier
to deliver tire samples to him the day prior to the
start of the official practice. Any modification of the
tread pattern by the Official Supplier is not permitted
after the start of the practices.
f. During free practices, qualifying practices,
Superpole for Superbike, warm up session and
races, front and rear tires may be required to be
marked with tire stickers (see Art. 2.4.7/ 2.5.7/ 2.6.7/
2.7.7/ 2.8.7).
g. The Technical Director may, at his discretion,
require the exchange of one (1) or more
competitors’ tires for a tire sample under his control.
The tires exchanged remain under his control and
he can exchange them for the tires of another
competitor.
h. An appropriate identification will be applied on the
left side of each tire by the entrant.
i. No tires marked for one event may be used during
another event.
Page 48 of 213
2.3.7.1
Tire allocations per class
The MotoAmerica technical director has the ability to
modify the tire allotments based on the official
schedule, this modification will be noted in the event
supplementary regulations. During a normally
scheduled two race platform event the tire allotments
will be as follows:
Front
Rear
Superbike
Class
7
9
Superstock 1000
5
6
Supersport
6
8
Superstock 600
4
5
KTM RC Cup
2
2
2.3.7.1.1. Superpole Participants
Superbike and Superstock 1000 Only. The 12
competitors that are eligible to participate in
Superpole will be allowed to use one (1) qualifying
tire which will be marked by a tire sticker separate
from the rider’s standard allocation. The
Superpole qualifying tire sticker will be distributed
and recorded by tire control staff before Superpole
begins. The qualifying tire does not count toward
the rider’s allocation.
2.3.8
Ballast
a. The use of ballast is allowed to stay over the
minimum weight limit. The use of ballast must be
declared to the Technical Director at the preliminary
checks.
b. The ballast must be made of solid metallic piece/s,
firmly and securely connected, either through an
adapter or directly to the main frame or engine, with
a minimum of 2 steel bolts (min. 8 mm diameter, 8.8
grade or over). Other equivalent technical solutions
must be submitted to the MotoAmerica Technical
Director for his approval.
c. Fuel in the fuel tank can be used as ballast.
Nevertheless, the verified weight may never fall
below the required minimum weight.
2.3.9
Timekeeping instruments
a. All motorcycles must have a correctly positioned
timekeeping transponder. The transponder must be
approved by the official Timekeeper. It must be
fitted as to avoid being shielded by carbon
bodywork. It is the team’s responsibility to ensure
that the transponder is working properly. Any
machine without a working transponder is not
allowed on the circuit.
Page 49 of 213
b. Correct attachment of the transponder bracket
consists of a minimum of tie-wraps, but preferably
by screws or rivets. Any transponder retaining clip
must also be secured by a tie-wrap. Velcro or
adhesive alone will not be accepted. The
transponder must be working at all times during
practices and races, also when the engine is
switched off.
Page 50 of 213
SUPERBIKE TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.4.10
2.4.11
2.4.12
2.4.13
2.4.14
SUPERBIKE TECH REGULATIONS
MOTORCYCLE SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE CONFIGURATIONS
BALANCING CONCEPTS
MINIMUM WEIGHT
NUMBERS & NUMBER PLATES
FUEL
TIRES
ENGINE
IGNITION & ELECTRONIC CONTROLS
MAIN FRAME
ITEMS MAY BE ALTERED/ REPLACED
ITEMS THAT MAY BE REMOVED
ITEMS THAT MUST BE REMOVED
ITEMS THAT MUST BE ALTERED
Page 51 of 213
51
51
51
51
54
54
55
55
57
65
60
81
81
81
82
2.4
SUPERBIKE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following rules are intended to give freedom to
modify or replace some parts in the interest of
safety, research and development and improved
competition between various motorcycle concepts.
EVERYTHING THAT IS NOT AUTHORIZED AND
PRESCRIBED IN THIS RULE IS STRICTLY
FORBIDDEN
If a change to a part or system is not specifically
allowed in any of the following articles, then it is
forbidden.
Superbike motorcycles require an FIM homologation
(see Art. 2.15). All motorcycles must comply in every
respect with all requirements for road racing as
specified in these Technical Regulations, unless they
are already equipped as such on the homologated
model.
The appearance from the front, rear and the profile
of Superbike motorcycles must (except when
otherwise stated) conform in principle to the
homologated shape (as originally produced by the
manufacturer). The appearance of the exhaust
system is excluded from this rule.
2.4.1
Motorcycle specifications
All parts and systems not specifically mentioned in
the following articles must remain as originally
produced by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle.
2.4.2
Engine
configurations
capacities
and
displacement
The following engine configurations comprise the
Superbike class.
• Over 750cc up to 1000cc
• Over 850cc up to 1200cc
3 and 4 cylinder
2 cylinder
The displacement capacity bore and stroke must
remain at the homologated size. Modifying the bore
and stroke to reach class limits is not allowed.
2.4.3
Balancing various motorcycle concepts
a. In order to equalize the performance of
motorcycles with different engine configurations,
an air restrictor may be applied according to
their respective racing performances.
b. This handicap is applied only to the ‘1200cc 2cylinder’ motorcycles.
c. A new 2-cylinder entry will not be included in the
‘Balancing various motorcycle concepts’ rules until
the performance is proven during the first two
Page 52 of 213
years of use in the MotoAmerica Superbike
Championship. In the case that a new 2-cylinder
entry wins a race in the Dry in the first year,
restrictors will be applied from the start of the
second year.
d. A new 2-cylinder entry is considered an entry by a
new manufacturer to the Championship – not a new
model of machine from an existing manufacture.
e. The air restrictor handicap will be applied
according to the relevant provisions described in
Art 2.4.3.3: the size of the intake ports will be
changed by means of air restrictors. These
changes to the size of the air restrictor diameter
will be applied in 2mm steps.
f. Each racing season will begin with the same
balancing level as the preceding season
finished.
g. The MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau can at any
time modify the handicap system to ensure fair
competition.
2.4.3.1
Balancing Calculation
a. After three events, the best manufacturers of the
1000cc 4 cylinders and 1200cc 2 cylinders will be
selected according to the sum of the points of the
best two riders for each manufacturer.
b. By taking the race points of the riders of the
selected 1000cc 4 cylinder manufacturer and of
the selected 1200cc 2 cylinder manufacturer in
each race, an average will be calculated after every
event, the ‘event average’.
1. If in any of the races there is only one finisher
from one of the selected manufacturers, the
‘event average’ will be calculated from the first
rider of each selected manufacturer in each race.
2. No ‘event average’ points will be calculated if
one of the selected manufacturers has no
finishers. The ‘event average’ will then be
calculated based on the results of the other race
from the same event.
3. If neither race has any finishers from one of the
selected manufacturers, the event will not be
considered.
c. ‘Wet’ races (as declared by the Race Direction)
are not taken in account for the calculation of an
‘event average’.
2.4.3.2
Air restrictors for 1200cc 2 cylinders
a. Application: Only the 1200cc 2-cylinder engines
will be fitted with air restrictors. Should a restrictor
be required then the first restrictor size to be
Page 53 of 213
installed will be equivalent to a Ø 52 mm circular
area. Air restrictor size will be adjusted in steps
equivalent to a change of 2mm in diameter,
between Ø52mm and to a minimum of Ø46mm
(None <> Ø52mm <> Ø50mm <> Ø48mm <>
Ø46mm), if needed during the Championship, as
described below in Art. 2.4.3.3
b. Definition: An air restrictor is a metallic device with
a tract of constant controlled section and which is
placed in the induction tract between the throttle
body and the cylinder head. The length of the
controlled tract must be at least 3 mm. No air
and/or air-fuel mixture to the engine must by-pass
the restrictor. No part of the fuel injection system
(injector, needle, slide, etc.) shall extend through
the restrictor.
c. The
Manufacturer
must
supply
the
FIM/MotoAmerica with 10 sets of plug-calibers
(gauges) to check the diameter of the air restrictor
when using one of the prescribed sizes (Ø 52, Ø
50, Ø 48, Ø 46 mm).
d. A Manufacturer may have a non-circular air
restrictor, provided that the area of this restrictor
is equivalent to the area of a nominal circular
restrictor. In this case, the Manufacturer must
supply the FIM/MotoAmerica with 10 sets of
plug-calibers (gauges) for measuring the restrictor
during the technical verifications.
e. The FIM/MotoAmerica may also request the
Manufacturer to supply a cut section of the air
restrictor(s) in each of the prescribed sizes.
2.4.3.3
Air restrictor adjustment
The minimum air restrictor size is increased or
decreased in 2 mm steps in diameter of equivalent
circular area, according to following procedure:
a. If the gap in the average value of ‘event
averages’, calculated as described in Art. 2.4.3.2
is more than 5 points in favor of the 1000cc 4cylinder manufacturer, and if a rider of a 1000cc 4cylinder motorcycle is leading the riders’
MotoAmerica Superbike Championship standings
at that time, then the initial air restrictor size of all
the 1200cc 2-cylinder motorcycles will be
increased by one size, or as a last step, the air
restrictor will be withdrawn.
b. If the resulting gap of the average value of ‘event
averages’, calculated as described in Art. 2.4.3.2,
is more than 5 points in favor of the 1200cc 2cylinder manufacturer, and if a rider of a
1200cc 2-cylinder motorcycle is leading the
riders’ MotoAmerica Superbike Championship
standings at that time, then the initial air restrictor
Page 54 of 213
size of the 1200cc 2-cylinder manufacturers will
be reduced by one size, or, as last step, to a
minimum of Ø46 mm (or the equivalent area
1661.9 mm2).
c. If the air restrictor size is not updated, then the
results of three more events will be considered
and the best manufacturers for each engine
configuration will be updated considering the sum
of points of the best two riders from each selected
manufacturer over six events, and updated every
third event. A new average value of the ‘event
averages’ will be calculated over six events, until
the points gap of the average value of the ‘event
averages’ from the last minimum weight update is
higher than 5.
d. The MotoAmerica Technical Director will inform all
teams about the possible air restrictor size
adjustments, within 24 hours from the end of the
last event, where the average value of the ‘event
averages’ was calculated. The new air restrictor
size adjustments must be applied from the first
following event.
2.4.4
Minimum weight
The minimum weight will be:
All machines
168kg (370.5lbs)
a. At any time during the event, the weight of the
whole motorcycle (including the tank and its
contents) must not be less than the minimum
weight.
b. There is no tolerance on the minimum weight of the
motorcycle.
c. During the final technical inspection at the end of
each race, the selected motorcycles will be
weighed in the condition they finished the race,
and the established weight limit must be met in
this condition. Nothing may be added to the
motorcycle. This includes all fluids.
d. During the practice and qualifying sessions, riders
may be asked to submit their motorcycle to a
weight control. In all cases, the rider must
comply with this request.
e. The use of ballast is allowed to stay over the
minimum weight limit and may be required due to
the handicap system. The use of ballast and
weight handicap must be declared to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director at the preliminary
checks.
2.4.5
Numbers and number plates
Numbers must be easily legible, in a clear simple font
Page 55 of 213
and contrast strongly with the background color.
Backgrounds must be of one single color over an area
large enough to provide a minimum clear area of 25
mm around the numbers.
The sizes for all the front numbers are:
Minimum height:
140 mm
Minimum width:
80 mm
Minimum stroke:
25 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
The sizes for all the side numbers are:
Minimum height:
120 mm
Minimum width:
70 mm
Minimum stroke:
20 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
The allocated number (& plate) for the rider must be
affixed on the motorcycle as follows:
a. Once on the front, either in the center of the fairing
or slightly off to one side; the number must be
centered on a strongly contrasting background
with no advertising within 25mm in all directions.
b. Once on both sides of the lower rear portion of the
lower fairing. The number must be centered on a
strongly contrasting background with no
advertising within 25mm in all directions.
c. Any outlines must be of a contrasting color and the
maximum width of the outline is 3mm. The
background color must be clearly visible around all
edges of the number (including outline). Reflective
or mirror type numbers are not permitted.
d. Numbers cannot overlap.
e. In case of a dispute concerning the legibility of
numbers, the decision of the MotoAmerica
Technical Director will be final.
2.4.6
Fuel
Refer to Article: 2.9
2.4.7
Tires
a. The maximum number of tires, of any type,
available to each rider during the event will be
specified in Article: 2.3.7
b. A maximum of 11 tires per rider can be mounted at
any time.
Page 56 of 213
c. Every tire used during the event must be marked
with an adhesive sticker with a number allocated
by the MotoAmerica Technical Director. The
sticker will be a different color front and rear.
d. For both Superbike races only, wet and
intermediate tires will not need to be marked with
a tire sticker. They will not be considered in
the total number of tires available for use;
however normal allocation limits still apply.
e. The tire stickers will be delivered to the teams in
a sealed envelope, on the day before the first
practice after which the teams will be responsible
for their use.
f. The use of motorcycles without the official
stickers will be immediately reported to the Race
Direction whom will take appropriate action.
g. After the third free practice session, the tire
supplier will allocate one (1) rear ‘qualifying tire’
to all riders that will participate in Superpole.
h. Qualifying tires can only be used during
Superpole.
i. If the qualifying tire is used during any session
(excluding Superpole), the rider will lose his
qualifying time and must start from the back of
the grid.
j. Any modification or treatment (cutting, grooving) is
forbidden
k. At the beginning of the event, the Official Supplier
may be requested by the MotoAmerica Technical
Director to deliver to him four (4) samples of each
type of tire to be used at the event.
l. The allocation of individual tires will be made on a
random basis, with no involvement of any
representative from the tire supplier, teams or
riders. Those tires will be individually identified and
may not be exchanged between riders, including
between team mates, and may not be
exchanged by the tire supplier after the allocation,
except with the permission of the Race Direction.
m. In exceptional cases, should the sticker be
damaged or applied in the wrong way, up to 2
extra stickers may be provided at the sole discretion
of the MotoAmerica Technical Director. However,
the damaged sticker must be returned to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director and/or the tire it
was applied to, must be absolutely intact.
Page 57 of 213
2.4.8
Engine
The following engine specifications and components
may not be altered from the homologated motorcycle
except as noted:
a. The homologated engine design model cannot be
changed.
b. The method of cam drive must remain as
homologated.
c. The method of valve retention must remain as
the homologated model. No pneumatic valve
retention devices are allowed unless fitted to
the homologated model.
d. The sequence in which the cylinders are ignited
(i.e. 1-2-4-3), must remain as originally designed
on the homologated model. Simultaneous firing of
2 cylinders is also forbidden if not adopted on the
homologated motorcycle. Up to 5 degrees firing
difference in 2 cylinders is regarded as
‘simultaneous’ firing.
2.4.8.1
Fuel injection systems
“Fuel injection systems” refers to throttle
bodies, fuel injectors, variable length intake
tract devices, fuel-pump, and fuel pressure
regulator.
a. The original homologated fuel injection system
must be used without any modification.
b. The fuel injectors must be stock and
unaltered from the original specification and
manufacture.
c. Air funnels may be altered or replaced.
d. Primary throttle valves cannot be changed or
modified.
e. Secondary throttle valves and shafts may be
removed or fixed in the open position and the
electronics may be disconnected or removed.
f. Variable intake tract devices cannot be added
if they are not present on the homologated
motorcycle and they must remain identical and
operate in the same way as the homologated
system. All the parts of the variable intake tract
device must remain exactly as homologated
(excepting the air funnels). Variable intake track
devices may be replaced with fixed air funnels.
g. Air and air/fuel mixture must go to the
combustion chamber exclusively through the
throttle body valves.
Page 58 of 213
h. Electronically
controlled
throttle
valves,
known as ‘ride-by-wire’, may only be used if
the homologated model is equipped with the
same system.
i. If the variable intake tract actuation mechanism
mounts or fuel injector mount is an integrated
part of the air funnel, then those parts alone may
be redesigned maintaining the exact geometry
of the original parts.
2.4.8.2
Cylinder Head
The homologated cylinder head may be modified as
follows:
a. The cylinder head must begin as a finished
production part using homologated materials and
castings. Material may only be added by epoxy or
removed by machining. No machining or
modification is allowed in the cam box / valve
mechanism area.
b. The induction and exhaust system including the
number of valves and or ports (intake and exhaust)
must be as homologated.
c. Porting and polishing of the cylinder head normally
associated with individual tuning such as gas
flowing of the cylinder head, including the
combustion chamber is allowed. Epoxy may be
used to shape the ports.
d. The throttle body intake insulators may be modified.
e. The compression ratio is free.
f. The combustion chamber may be modified.
g. Valves must remain as homologated.
h. Valve seats can be modified or replaced for
repair. The material must remain as homologated.
i. Valve guides must remain as homologated.
Modifications in the port area are allowed by
machining.
j. Valve springs may be altered or replaced, their
material must remain as homologated. An
additional spring may be added or the spring
may be removed.
k. Valve spring retainers, collets, spring seats may be
altered or replaced.
l. Valves must remain in the homologated location
and at the same angle as the homologated valves.
m. Rocker arms (if any) must remain as homologated.
Page 59 of 213
n. The exhaust air bleed system must be blocked and
the external fittings on the cam cover(s) may be
replaced by plates.
o. The shim buckets / tappets may be replaced but
must be the same height, diameter, material
type, surface finish and shim to top surface
dimension as the homologated part. The weight
must be equal to or greater than the
homologated part.
p. The homologated cylinder head / cam cover may
be replaced by a cosmetic replica of higher
specific weight material (i.e. replace magnesium
part with aluminum).
2.4.8.3
Camshaft
a. Camshafts may be altered or replaced from those
fitted to the homologated motorcycle (see also Art.
2.4.8).
b. Offsetting the camshaft is not allowed. The
camshaft must remain in the homologated
location.
2.4.8.4
Cam sprockets or cam gears
a. Camshaft sprockets, pulleys or gears may be
altered or replaced to allow degreeing of the
camshafts (see also Art. 2.4.8).
b. The cam chain or cam belt tensioning device(s) can
be modified or changed.
c. The cam chain may be altered or replaced but
must remain the same type.
2.4.8.5
Cylinders
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
b. The cylinder base gasket(s) may be changed.
2.4.8.6
Pistons
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.4.8.7
Piston rings
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.4.8.8
Piston pins and clips
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.4.8.9
Connecting rods
a. Connecting rod may be altered or replaced from
those fitted to the homologated motorcycle. The
Page 60 of 213
weight must be the same or greater than the
original homologated part.
b. The material must be the same type as the
homologated item. (i.e. steel, titanium, alloy) or
steel.
c. If the original connecting rod is fitted with a
little end insert, then the replacement connecting
rods may also have an insert of the same material
as fitted in the original homologated connecting rod.
d. If the original homologated connecting rod is
not fitted with a little end insert, then the
replacement connecting rods may be fitted with
an insert of any material.
e. From 2018: If the original homologated
connecting rod is not fitted with a little end
insert then the replacement connecting rods
may be fitted with an insert of the same material
as the connecting rod or steel.
f. The center to center (little end to big end) length
of the rod must be the same as the original
homologated item.
g. Connecting rod bolts are free.
2.4.8.10 Crankshaft
Only the following modifications are allowed to the
homologated crankshaft:
a. Bearing surfaces may be polished.
b. Surface treatments
crankshaft.
may be
applied
to the
c. Balancing is allowed but only by the same
method as the homologated crankshaft. For
example heavy metal, i.e.: Mallory metal inserts,
are not permitted unless they are originally
specified in the homologated crankshaft.
d. The addition or reduction in weight of the
crankshaft in order to reach a racing balance
can be no higher than 5% of the homologated
weight without the tolerance as shown on the
homologation drawing of the crankshaft.
e. The balancing must be performed by the original
method i.e. drilling or machining and in the same
position (i.e. edge of flywheels).
f. Polishing of the crankshaft is not allowed.
g. Balance shaft must remain as homologated. No
modifications are allowed.
Page 61 of 213
2.4.8.11 Crankcase / Gearbox housing
a. Crankcases must remain as homologated. If the
crankcases have an integral cylinder then the top
face of the cylinder may be ground to adjust deck
height. Oil Spray nozzles may be modified. No other
modifications are allowed (including painting,
polishing and lightening).
b. It is not allowed to add a pump used to create a
vacuum in the crankcase. If a vacuum pump is
installed on the homologated motorcycle then it
may be used only as homologated.
c. Oil-pan (sump) may be altered or replaced and oil
pick up may be altered or replaced.
d. One thread may be altered for direct oil
pressure/temperature
sensor fitting in the
crankcases or engine covers.
e. See 2.4.10.1 g.
f. Oil breather cover must remain as homologated
but the internal breather/damper plate can be
modified or replaced.
2.4.8.11.1 Lateral covers and protection
a. Lateral (side) covers may be altered, modified
or replaced (excluding pump covers). If altered
or modified, the cover must have at least the
same resistance to impact as the original. If
replaced, the cover must be made in material of
same or higher specific weight and the total weight
of the cover must not be less than the original.
b. Titanium bolts may be used to fasten lateral covers.
c. All lateral covers/engine cases containing oil and
which could be in contact with the ground during
a crash, must be either replaced by a ‘heavier’
engine cover or protected by a second cover made
from metal such as aluminum alloy, stainless steel,
steel or titanium, or an approved cover.
d. Any secondary covers must cover a minimum of
1/3 of the original cover. It must have no sharp
edges to damage the track surface. These covers
must be fixed properly and securely with a
minimum of three (3) case cover screws that
also mount the original covers/engine cases to
the crankcases.
e. Plates or crash bars from aluminum or steel also
are permitted in addition to these covers. All of
these devices must be designed to be resistant
against sudden shocks, abrasions and crash
damage.
f. FIM approved covers will be permitted without
regard of the material or dimensions.
Page 62 of 213
g. These covers must be fixed properly and securely
with case cover screws that also mount the original
covers/engine cases to the crankcases.
h. Oil containing engine covers cannot be secured
with aluminum bolts.
i. The MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right
to refuse any cover not satisfying this safety
purpose.
2.4.8.12 Transmission / Gearbox
a. Stock transmission shafts and gear set only.
Shimming is allowed.
b. Undercutting and surface treatments are permitted.
c. OEM Shift drum detent stars may be modified or
replaced.
d. External Quick-shift systems are
(including wire and potentiometer).
permitted
e. Countershaft sprocket, rear wheel sprocket, chain
pitch and size can be changed. Chain master links
must be rivet type.
f. Final drive system, if not by chain, may be
modified to chain type using kits specified on the
eligible equipment list.
g. The sprocket cover may be modified or
eliminated.
2.4.8.13 Clutch
a. Aftermarket or modified clutches are permitted.
b. Back torque limiter is permitted.
c. Friction and drive discs may be changed.
d. Clutch springs may be changed.
e. Any power source (i.e. hydraulic or electric)
cannot be used for clutch operation, if not
installed in the homologated model for road use.
Human power is excluded from the ban.
f. Clutch system (wet or dry), type (multi-plate) and
method of operation (cable/hydraulic) must remain
as homologated.
g. Clutch basket (outer) must be the originally fitted
and homologated part but may be reinforced.
2.4.8.14 Oil pumps and oil lines
a. The originally fitted and homologated oil pumps
may be modified, only the original pump parts
may be modified, and or shims/spacers added.
Modifications include:
1. Blueprinting.
Page 63 of 213
2. Changing the oil pressure relief spring.
3. Reducing gear and/or housing thickness.
b. The external
homologated.
appearance
must
remain
as
c. Oil lines may be modified or replaced. Oil lines
containing positive pressure, if replaced, must be
of metal reinforced construction with swaged or
treaded connectors.
2.4.8.15 Radiator / Oil cooler
a. The only liquid engine coolants permitted is
water.
b. The original radiator or oil cooler may be altered
or replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle.
c. Additional radiators or oil coolers may be added.
d. The original oil/water heat exchanger may be
modified, replaced or removed.
e. The cooling system hoses and catch tanks may be
changed.
f. Radiator fan and wiring may be changed, modified
or removed.
g. The oil cooler must not be mounted on or above the
rear mudguard.
h. The appearance from the front, rear and profile of
the motorcycle must in principle conform to the
homologated shape after the addition of
additional radiators or oil coolers.
2.4.8.16 Air box
a. The air box must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed
except as noted in the following.
b. If the homologated air box is used to mount top
type fuel injectors, then the air box and the
attached systems must remain as homologated.
c. If the homologated air box is used to mount
variable intake tract devices, then the air box and
the
attached
systems must remain as
homologated and function in the same way
(excepting the air funnels – see article 2.4.8.1).
d. If used, Variable intake tract devices must
function in the same way (excepting the air
funnels – see article 2.4.8.1).
e. Air filters, internal flap type valve, sensors and
vacuum fittings may be removed, modified or
replaced with aftermarket parts.
Page 64 of 213
f. Any holes in the air box to the outside
atmosphere resulting from the removal of
components must be completely sealed from
incoming air.
g. The air box drains must be sealed.
h. Ram air tubes or ducts running from the fairing
to the air box may be modified, replaced or
removed. If tubes/ducts are utilized, they must be
attached to the original, unmodified air box inlets.
i. All motorcycles must have a closed breather
system. All oil breather lines must be connected
(may pass through an oil catch tank) and
exclusively discharge in the air box.
j. If the top of the airbox is formed by the bottom of
the tank then that part of the tank will be
considered as the airbox and must conform to its
homologated shape excepting 2mm variance in
corner radii and must be the same volume. A dry
break / quick release connector may be fitted.
See art 2.4.8.17.
k. Additional heat shielding is allowed to be applied to
the lower face / side of the airbox (i.e. heat tape).
2.4.8.17 Fuel supply
a. Fuel pump and fuel pressure regulator must be
the originally fitted and homologated part with
no modification allowed.
b. The fuel pressure must be as homologated.
c. The pressure tolerance at the technical control is
+0.5 bar in respect to the maximum pressure of
the homologated motorcycle.
d. All motorcycles must have a special device on the
fuel line in accordance with FIM specifications for
fuel pressure checks, or teams must provide a
temporary adaptor to allow checks.
e. Fuel lines from the fuel tank
(fuel hoses, delivery pipe
clamps, fuel canister) may
must be located in such a
protected from crash damage.
up to the injectors
assembly, joints,
be replaced and
way that they are
f. Quick connectors or dry break connectors may be
used.
g. Fuel vent lines may be replaced.
h. Fuel filters may be added.
2.4.8.18 Exhaust system
a. Exhaust pipes and silencers may be altered or
replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle. Catalytic converters must be removed.
Page 65 of 213
b. The number of the final exhaust silencer(s) must
remain as homologated. The silencer(s) must be
on the same side(s) as on the homologated
model.
c. For safety reasons, the exposed edge(s) of the
exhaust pipe(s) outlet(s) must be rounded to avoid
any sharp edges.
d. Wrapping of exhaust systems is not allowed
except in the area of the rider’s foot or an area
in contact with the fairing for protection from heat.
e. The noise limit for Superbikes will be 115 dB/A
(with a 3 dB/A tolerance after the race only)
measured at 6,000 rpm (4 cylinder) and 5,500 rpm
(2 and 3 cylinder) except for where local rules
prevail. The test will be carried out according to
the details noted in Art. 2.13.
2.4.9
Ignition and Electronic Control System
a. The engine control system (including ECU) must be
either:
1. A DWO/FIM approved “Superbike Kit System”,
for full details see Art. 2.4.9.1.
2. An approved Superstock 1000 System, for full
details see Art. 2.6.9.1.
b. No other external ignition/injection controllers,
traction control modules or other active expansion
modules or calculation units may be fitted.
c. Central unit (ECU) may be relocated.
d. Telemetry (remote signals to or from the bike) is not
allowed.
e. No remote or wireless connection to the bike for
any data exchange or setting is allowed whilst the
engine is running or the bike is moving.
f. Spark plugs, spark plug caps and HT leads (if
applicable) are free.
g. Battery is free.
2.4.9.1
The DWO/FIM approved ‘Superbike Kit System’
must meet the following:
a. The system must be a complete package including
all electrical / electronic parts not supplied on the
homologated motorcycle required for full operation
of all strategies – excepting the wiring harness.
b. Only the machine manufacturer or one approved
partner can submit a single system for approval.
c. The total price of the complete system including
ECU, dashboard/display, all additional sensors
essential for full operation of all strategies, IMU,
Page 66 of 213
software, enable codes, data logging, analysis
software, ECU ‘tuning’ or ‘setting’ software, datalogger, download / connection cable, example
harness design, manual for use, (not a complete
list), is €8000 Euro (excluding taxes). Data Logging
only sensors are excluded from the price cap.
d. There must be at least 50 Superbike Kit Systems
(currently approved system) available worldwide
per season, if ordered, through authorized
distributors or dealers. The Superbike Kit System
must be marked and considered as for race use
only.
e. Lead time less than 8 weeks.
f. The ECU must be from the FIM/DWO Approved
Superbike ECU List.
g. The following sensors may be used:
1. Throttle position (multiple)
2. Map sensor, Map Sync (pressure sensor on the
intake port used to synchronize the engine during
the start)
3. Airbox Pressure
4. Engine pick-ups (Cam, crank) (Crank trigger may
be replaced)
5. Lambda
6. Exhaust valve/Motor position/feedback
7. Twist grip position
8. Front speed
9. Rear Speed
10. Gearbox output shaft speed
11. Gear position
12. Gear shift load cell
13. Front brake pressure
14. Rear brake pressure
15. Oil pressure
16. Air pressure
17. Water temperature
18. Air temperature
19. IMU (various signals)
20. Transponder / Lap time signal
21. Knock Sensor
Page 67 of 213
22. Fuel pressure
23. Oil temperature
24. Fork position
25. Shock position
26. Tilt / Tip-Over Switch
27. GPS Unit
28. Rear tire temperature (External) (Multiple)
29. Rear TPMS Monitor (Temperature and Pressure)
h. Sensors on the above list that are originally
fitted to the standard machine may be replaced
with alternative sensors, however they must be
included in the Superbike Kit System and inside
the total price (Art 2.4.9.1c).
i. Two (2) further additional sensor channels (that are
not included in the above list) may be added to the
machine.
j. Redundant/doubled sensors are allowed but must
be included in the Superbike Kit System if they are
required for safe operation.
k. Analogue/Logic to CAN sensors are allowed.
l. The sensors originally fitted to the homologated
machine and used as homologated, will not be
included in the price limit.
m. When the following sensors are damaged through
crashes they may be replaced by parts of the same
function but do not have to be the same specific part
from the Superbike Kit System:
1. Fork and Shock Potentiometers
2. Brake pressure sensors
3. Gear shift sensor (but must remain the same type
included with the kit – i.e. Load cell, switch etc.)
n. Before the final pre-season test, before the midseason test(s) or at the season midpoint and within
three hours of the last race of the season any
firmware / software updates being used by the
factory teams must be made available to all same
manufacturer customer SBK teams (more frequent
updates are allowed).
o. The manufacturer must provide current strategies
but may remove the ability to change or see these
settings, base mapping must be provided.
p. Only firmware and software from the FIM/DWO
approved software and firmware list may be used.
Page 68 of 213
q. Factory Teams may use any development firmware
and software which will be made available to teams
according to the update schedule.
r. Any essential hardware updates required must
be made available to customer teams from the
same race as the factory teams and available
free of charge to update those Superbike Kit
Systems purchased in the current season.
s. Transponder is NOT included in the ‘’Superbike Kit
System’’.
t. The selection of logged channels is free.
u. Coils and coil drivers are free and must be included
in the Superbike Kit System if altered.
v. No other external ignition/injection controllers,
traction control modules or other active expansion
modules or calculation units may be fitted unless
included in the Superbike System.
w. The factory team must use the current seasons
‘’Superbike Kit System’’. No backdated parts may
be used.
x. Superbike kit systems remain approved for 3
seasons (first season inclusive).
Manufacturer nominated Superbike Kit System
suppliers please also see ‘’Superbike Kit System
Approval Requirements’’ documentation.
2.4.9.2
DWO/FIM approved ‘Superstock 1000’ kit model.
See Art 2.6.9.1
2.4.9.3
Generator, alternator, electric starter
a. The stator/coils must be the originally fitted with
homologated parts with no modifications
allowed.
b. The flywheel may be modified or replaced.
c. The ACG must generate sufficiently to maintain
battery charge.
d. The use of a ‘booster’ battery is permitted except
during parc fermé.
e. The electric starter must operate normally and
always attempt to start the engine during the event.
f. During parc fermé the starter must crank the
engine at a suitable speed for starting for a
minimum of 2 seconds without the use of a
boost battery. No boost battery may be
connected to the machine after the end of the
session.
Page 69 of 213
g. The starter motor gear system must be the originally
fitted and homologated parts. Surface and
hardening treatments are allowed.
h. Motorcycles should self-start on the starting grid
in neutral. Push-starting on the starting grid is not
allowed, however start line Officials may push
start the motorcycle if necessary (in gear).
2.4.9.4
Wiring harness
a. The Wiring Harness is free.
b. Each team must provide a download connection
lead to the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
2.4.10
Main frame
a. During the entire duration of the event, each
rider may only use one (1) complete motorcycle,
as presented for Technical Control, with the
frame clearly identified with a seal. In case the
frame needs to be replaced, the rider or the team
must request the use of a spare frame to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director.
b. One (1) Spare complete motorcycle is allowed
per rider.
c. A team may opt to have one (1) spare machine
shared by two or more riders.
Explanation of Procedures
Only one (1) complete motorcycle may be presented
for the preliminary technical checks and it will be the
only motorcycle allowed on the track and in the front of
pit box during the practices, qualifying, Superpole and
races.
The frame of this motorcycle will be officially sealed by
the MotoAmerica Technical Director or by his
appointed staff. The seal will bear a serial number,
which will be recorded. Any attempt made to remove
the seal will damage it irreparably.
At any time during the event the technical stewards,
under the direction of the MotoAmerica Technical
Director, may check the seal and verify that it conforms
to the motorcycle and rider it was assigned to. For
cross reference, every frame must have a unique
number (VIN) punched on it, on the steering-head.
If the primary or active motorcycle is damaged in a
crash or in any other incident and is declared
unrepairable (safely and in the available time) by the
MotoAmerica Technical Director or his appointed
staff, then the seal on the damaged motorcycle will
be destroyed by the technical staff and the chassis
of this motorcycle must not be used for the
remainder of the event. The new serial number will
be recorded by the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
Page 70 of 213
During set up day (usually the day before first
official practice session) no restrictions apply
regarding the location of the spare motorcycle.
From the start of the first practice session, any
spare motorcycle must be kept out of view. It is
recommended that teams incorporate an area for
this purpose. During an event minor adjustments
may be made to the spare motorcycle, the intent
being to allow teams to maintain parity with the
primary motorcycle.
In the event the spare motorcycle is used in
competition, the primary motorcycle is taken out
of competition.
The spare motorcycle can only be used in the next
session to which the incident occurred rendering
the primary motorcycle not able to be used. In a
race situation if the primary motorcycle is required
to be replaced with the spare motorcycle at any
time during a race, the first opportunity to use the
spare motorcycle is the next session or race. A
race is deemed to have begun when the rider exits
pit lane for the sighting laps. All restarts, including
those three laps or less, are a continuation of the
original race or session.
The team may rebuild the original primary
motorcycle, however only in the case of TOTAL
PROVEN WRECKAGE with the spare motorcycle
can an application be made to utilize the original
motorcycle. The decision of the technical Director
regarding this is final.
The damaged frame may be impounded by the
MotoAmerica Technical Director for later examination.
2.4.10.1 Frame body and sub-frames
a. The main frame must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with only the following
modifications allowed.
b. The main frame may only be altered by the addition
of gussets or tubes. No gussets or tubes may be
removed; other modifications are allowed within
the following section of these rules.
c. Holes may be drilled on the frame only to fix
approved components (i.e. fairing brackets,
steering damper mount).
d. The engine must be
homologated position.
mounted
in
the
e. Suspension linkage mounting points on the
frame must remain as homologated.
f. The steering stem axis/position may be
adjusted by moving the steering head bearings.
The fore and aft position of each bearing can be
Page 71 of 213
a maximum +/-9 mm in respect to the original
bearing location (excluding tolerances). Fore
and aft is considered at the intersection of the
pivot axis and the original bottom plane of the
bearing cup/insert, if no insert is fitted in the
homologated machine then it is considered
along the bottom plane of the original bearing
seat.
1. If
the
homologated
machine
has
exchangeable bearing inserts/ bushes: The
bushings/inserts are free to make the above
adjustment and the homologated position is
considered as the position in which the
production motorcycle is supplied.
2. If the homologated motorcycle has fixed
bearing positions for the steering stem:
Steering angle changes are permitted by
fitting inserts onto the bearing seats of the
original steering head. The original bearing
seats may be modified (ovaled) or increased
in diameter to insert special bushings. No
part of these special bushings may protrude
axially more than 3 mm from the original
steering head pipe location nor may the
bearing be inset. The steering head pipe can
be reinforced in the area of the bearing seats.
Welding and machining is allowed for the
purpose of making these modifications.
g. The swing arm pivot axis may be moved a
maximum of 5 mm radially (excluding tolerances)
measured from the homologated axis. Welding
and machining is allowed for the purpose of
making this modification, regardless of the
technology used and the dimensions of the
component or section of the frame (i.e.: cast,
fabricated, etc.). The method of adjustment is
free (i.e. bushings, inserts, offset axles). For
machines fitted with exchangeable inserts as
standard then the homologated position is
considered as the position in which the
production motorcycle is supplied. Should this
pivot / axles pass through the crankcases then
the relevant crankcase mounting hole may be
machined larger, no welding or other
modifications will be permitted. Crankcases
may be machined for swing arm clearance only.
h. The original lock stops may be removed from
the frame body by grinding or machining.
However, another form of lock stop must be
fitted.
i. All motorcycles must display a unique vehicle
identification number punched on the frame
body (a proper “legal VIN” or a unique
designation by the team to which the technical
Page 72 of 213
director may choose to append). No detachable
plates are permitted.
j. No polishing or surface refinishing is allowed but the
paint scheme is not restricted.
k. Front and rear sub frame may be changed altered
or removed.
2.4.10.2 Suspension - General
a. Participants in the Superbike class must only
use suspension components from the
Superbike or Superstock 1000 approved and
listed suspension units for that season.
b. The approved products from the manufacturers
must be available to all participants at least one
month before the first round of the Superbike
season, and remain available all season. The
products must be available within 6 weeks of a
confirmed order.
c. Setting parts and tuning parts must be provided
by the suspension manufacturers to all
customers / teams / participants using the
manufacturer’s products. These parts can be
used by all participants during the season.
These parts shall be available for immediate
delivery to all teams/customers.
d. Teams may not modify any part of the forks or
shock absorber, all setting parts must be supplied
by the Suspension manufacturer and available to
all teams/riders.
e. The suspension manufacturers are allowed to
offer service contracts when the team is using
the approved and listed suspension products.
The suspension manufacturers cannot demand
a service contract for a customer or participant
in order to obtain a suspension product.
f. Electronic suspension:
1. No aftermarket or prototype electronicallycontrolled suspensions maybe used.
Electronically-controlled suspension may
only be used if already present on the
production model of the homologated
motorcycle.
2. The electronically-controlled valves must remain
as homologated. The shims, spacers and
fork/shock springs not connected with these
valves can be changed.
3. The ECU for the electronic suspension must
remain as homologated and cannot receive
any motorcycle track position or sector
information; the suspension cannot be
Page 73 of 213
adjusted relative to track position.
4. The electronic interface between the rider and
the suspension must remain as on the
homologated motorcycle. It is allowed to remove
or disable this rider interface.
5. The original suspension system must work
safely in the event of an electronic failure.
6. Electro-magnetic fluid systems which
change the viscosity of the suspension
fluid(s) during operation are not permitted.
g. Electronic controlled steering damper can only be
used if installed on the homologated model for
road use. However, it must be completely
standard (any mechanical or electronic part
must remain as homologated).
2.4.10.3 Front Suspension
a. The front fork in whole or part may be changed
but must be the same type homologated
(leading link, telescopic, etc.).
b. The upper and lower fork clamps (triple clamp,
fork bridges) and stem may be changed or
modified.
c. A steering damper may be added or replaced
with an ‘after-market’ damper.
d. The steering damper cannot act as a steering
lock limiting device.
2.4.10.4 Rear fork (Swing-arm)
a. The rear fork may be altered or replaced from
those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
However, the type single or double sided must
remain as homologated.
b. The use of carbon fiber or Kevlar materials is
not allowed if not homologated on the original
motorcycle.
c. A chain guard must be fitted in such a way as to
reduce the possibility that any part of the riders’
body may become trapped between the lower
chain run and the rear wheel sprocket.
d. Rear wheel stand brackets may be added to the
rear fork by welding or by bolts.
e. Brackets must have rounded edges (with a large
radius). Fastening screws must be recessed.
f. Swing arm spindle (pivot) may be modified or
replaced.
2.4.10.5 Rear suspension unit
Page 74 of 213
a. Rear suspension unit may be changed but a similar
system must be used (i.e. dual or mono).
b. The rear suspension linkage may be modified or
replaced.
c. The original fixing points on the frame (if any) must
be used to mount the shock absorber, linkage and
rod assembly fulcrum (pivot points).
d. Removable top shock mounts may be replaced. If
replaced they must retain their homologated
geometry.
2.4.10.6 Wheels
a. Wheels may be replaced (see Art. 2.3.4) and
associated parts may be altered or replaced from
those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
b. Aftermarket wheels must be made from aluminum
(aluminum) alloys.
c. The use of the following alloy materials for the
wheels is not allowed: Beryllium (>=5%), Scandium
(>=2%), Lithium (>=1%).
d. Each specific racing wheel model must be approved
and certified according to JASO (Japanese
Automotive Standards Organization) T 203-85
where W (maximum design load) of art. 11.1.3 is 195
kg for front wheel and 195 kg for rear wheel, K = 1.5
for front and rear wheels. Static radius of tire: front
0.301 m, rear 0.331 m.
e. Wheel manufacturers must provide copy of the
certificate for their wheel(s) as proof of compliance
to the MotoAmerica Technical Director when
requested.
f. The homologated road bike wheel and sprocket
carrier assembly may be used with no modification,
irrespective of material. They must meet article
2.4.10.6.(d)(e). Bearings and spacers may be
changed.
g. On motorcycles equipped with a double sided swing
arm (rear fork), the rear sprocket and brake rotor
must remain on the rear wheel when the wheel is
removed.
h. Bearings, seals, and axles may be altered or
replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle. The use of titanium and light alloys is
forbidden for wheel spindles (axles).
i. Wheel balance weights may be discarded, changed
or added to.
j. Any inflation valves may be used.
Page 75 of 213
Wheel rim diameter size (front and rear)
17 inches
Front wheel rim width:
3.50 inches
Rear wheel rim width:
6.00 inches
2.4.10.7 Brakes
a. Participants in the Superbike season must only
use the approved and listed front brake parts
(Calipers, master cylinders, brake discs, brake
pads and dry break systems) for that season.
b. The approved products from the manufacturers
must be available to all participants at least one
month before the first round of the
MotoAmerica Superbike season, and remain
available all season. The products must be
available within 4 weeks of a confirmed order.
c. No parts can be added to the approved list
during the current season. Performance related
updates are not allowed. Any product changes
due to manufacturing or material supply issues
must be approved in advance.
d. Front brake master cylinder may be altered or
replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle.
e. Front brake calipers may be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
f. Rear brake master cylinder may be altered or
replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle.
g. Rear brake calipers may be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
h. Brake pads or shoes may be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
i. Brake hoses and brake couplings may be altered
or replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle. The split of the front brake lines for
both front brake calipers must be made above the
lower fork bridge (lower triple clamp).
j. Brake discs may be altered or replaced from
those fitted to the homologated motorcycle. Only
steel (max. carbon content 2.1 wt. %) is allowed for
brake discs. Alloys containing beryllium are not
allowed to be used for brake calipers.
k. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) may be used
only if installed in the homologated model for
road use. However, it must be completely
standard (any mechanical or electronic part must
remain as homologated, brake discs and master
cylinder levers excluded), and only the software of
the ABS may be modified.
Page 76 of 213
l. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) can be
disconnected and its ECU can be dismantled. The
ABS rotor wheel can be deleted, modified or
replaced.
m. Motorcycles must be equipped with brake lever
protection, intended to protect the handlebar
brake lever from being accidentally activated in
case of collision with another motorcycle.
Composite guards are not permitted. FIM
approved guards will be permitted without regard
to the material. The MotoAmerica Technical
Director has the right to refuse any guard not
satisfying this safety purpose.
2.4.10.8 Handlebars and hand controls
a. Handlebars, hand controls (Subject to Art 2.4.8.1)
and cables may be altered or replaced from those
fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
b. Cable operated throttles (grip assembly) must be
equipped with both an opening and a closing cable
including when actuating a remote ride by wire
grip/demand sensor.
c. Motorcycles must be equipped with a functional
ignition kill switch or button mounted on the
right hand handlebar (within reach of the hand
while on the hand grips) that is capable of stopping
a running engine. The button or switch must be red.
2.4.10.9 Foot rest and foot controls
a. Foot rests, hangers/brackets and hardware may
be
replaced
and
relocated
but
the
hangers/brackets must be mounted to their
original frame mounting points.
b. Foot rests may be rigidly mounted or a folding
type which must incorporate a device to return
them to the normal position.
c. The end of the foot rest must have at least an 8mm
solid spherical radius.
d. Non folding footrests must have an end (plug)
which is permanently fixed, made of aluminum,
plastic, Teflon
or equivalent type of material
(min. radius of 8mm). The plug surface must be
designed to reach the widest possible area of the
footrest. The MotoAmerica Technical Director has
the right to refuse any plug not satisfying this safety
purpose.
2.4.10.10 Fuel Tank
a. The fuel tank must conform in principle to the
homologated appearance and location of the
original tank; however, it’s actual shape can be
slightly changed to suit the rider’s preference
Page 77 of 213
and increased fuel volume. The tank may be
modified below the upper frame line and under
the seat.
b. The tank may be replaced by a fuel cell and a
structural cover.
c. The material of construction of the fuel tank may be
altered from the one of the tank fitted to the
homologated motorcycle.
d. All fuel tanks must be filled with fire retardant
material (i .e . f ue l ta nk f o am ) , or be fitted with
a fuel cell bladder.
e. Fuel tanks made of composite materials (carbon
fiber, aramid fiber, glass fiber, etc.) must have
passed the FIM Standards for fuel tanks or be lined
with a fuel cell bladder.
f. Tanks made of composite material must bear
the label certifying conformity with FIM Fuel Tank
Test Standards. Fuel tanks without a fuel cell
bladder must bear a label certifying conformity
with FIM Fuel Tank Test Standards.
g. Such labels must include the fuel tank
manufacturer’s name, date of tank manufacture,
and name of testing laboratory.
h. Each manufacturer is requested to inform the
FIM/CCR Secretariat of its fuel tank model(s)
which have passed the FIM test standards,
together with a copy of the fuel tank label. Full
details of the FIM Fuel Tank Test Standards and
Procedures are available from the FIM (See
‘Fuel Tank Test Standards’ below).
i. Fuel cell bladders must conform to or exceed the
specification FIM/FCB- 2005. Full details of this
standard are available from the FIM.
j. The fuel tank must be fixed to the frame from the
front and the rear with a crash-proof assembly
system. Bayonet style couplings cannot be used,
nor may the tank be fixed to any parts of the
streamlining (fairing) or any plastic part. The
MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right to
refuse a motorcycle if he is of the opinion that the
fuel tank fixation is not safe.
k. The original tank may be modified to achieve the
maximum capacity of 24 liters, provided the original
profile is as homologated.
l. A cross over line between each side of the tank
is allowed (maximum inside diameter 10 mm).
m. Fuel tanks with tank breather pipes must be fitted
with non-return valves which discharge into a catch
Page 78 of 213
tank with a minimum volume of 250 cc made of a
suitable material.
n. Fuel tank filler caps may be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle,
and when closed, must be leak proof. Additionally,
they must be secured to prevent accidental
opening at any time.
o. The same size fuel tank used in practice must be
used during the entire event.
2.4.10.10.1 Fuel tank homologation
a. Any fuel tanks, made of non-ferrous materials (with
the exception of aluminum) must be tested
according to the test procedure prescribed by the
FIM.
b. Each manufacturer is responsible for testing its
own fuel tank model(s) and will certify that the
fuel tank exceeds the FIM test standard, if it has
passed the FIM test procedure for fuel tanks.
c. Each manufacturer must affix a quality and test
label on each fuel tank type that is produced for
competition use. This quality and test label will be
the recognition of a fuel tank model which has
passed the FIM test procedure.
d. All fuel tanks that are made to the same design,
dimensions, number of fiber layers, grade of fiber,
percentage of resin, etc., must be identified with
the same quality and test label.
e. The quality and test label will include the
following information on each label affixed to each
fuel tank: name of the fuel tank manufacturer, date
of fabrication, code or part number, name of testing
laboratory, fuel capacity.
f. Each manufacturer is requested to inform the
FIM/CCR Secretariat of its fuel tank model(s)
which have passed the FIM test procedure, with a
copy of the quality and test label, according to point
e.
g. Only fuel tanks that have passed the FIM test
procedure will be accepted.
2.4.10.11 Fairing / Bodywork
a. The fairing, mudguards and body work must
conform in principle to the homologated shape
as originally produced by the manufacturer.
Headlights must be included even when
considered external.
b. The fairing has a tolerance of +/-15mm from the
original homologated road fairing, respecting the
design and features of the homologated fairing, with
the exception of the oil containing portion of the
Page 79 of 213
lower fairing, seat area and the area supporting the
screen. The overall width of the frontal area may be
+30mm maximum. The decision of the Technical
Director will be final.
c. The windscreen may be replaced.
d. The ram-air intake must maintain the originally
homologated shape and dimensions.
e. The original air ducts running between the fairing
to the airbox may be altered or replaced from
those fitted to the homologated motorcycle. Particle
grilles or “wire-meshes” originally installed in
the openings for the air ducts may be removed.
f. The lower fairing has to be constructed to hold,
in case of an engine breakdown, at least half of
the total oil and engine coolant capacity used in
the engine (min. 5 liters). The lower edge of
openings in the fairing must be positioned at least
70 mm above the bottom of the fairing.
g. There may not be exit air vents in the front half
of the lower fairing 40mm below a horizontal
centerline between the wheel axles of the
machine. The Technical Director may give
permission for the lower fairing to have
additional vents added if vents have been filled
to meet this and the oil containment
requirements.
h. Any added vents will not allow the exit of air in
the front half of the fairing lower if they are
behind a water or oil radiator.
i. Exceptions may be made to 2.4.10.11.g with the
sole agreement of the FIM Superbike Technical
Director if a manufacturer produced a FIM approved
close fitting, oil containing engine shroud and it is
fitted in addition to the belly pan. In this case OEM
shaped air vents will be allowed in the front lower
half of the fairing.
j. Any vents in the fairing lower must have their inner
surface leading edge in-line with the trailing edge or
overlap to reduce the risk of liquid spraying from the
machine.
k. The lower fairing must incorporate one hole of 25
mm in the bottom of the front lower area. This hole
must remain closed in dry conditions and must be
opened only in wet race conditions, as declared by
the Race Director.
l. Minimal changes are allowed in the fairing to permit
the use of an elevator (stand) for wheel changes
and to add plastic protective cones to the frame or
the engine.
Page 80 of 213
m. Holes may be drilled or cut in the fairing or
bodywork to allow additional increased intake air to
the oil cooler. Holes bigger than 10mm must be
covered with a particle grill or fine wire mesh.
Grill/mesh must be painted to match the
surrounding material.
n. Original openings for cooling in the lateral
fairing/bodywork sections may be partially closed
only to accommodate sponsors' logos/lettering.
Such modification shall be made using wire
mesh or perforated plate. The material is free
but the distance between all opening centers, circle
centers and their diameters must be constant.
Holes or perforations must have an open area ratio
> 60%.
o. If the upper fairing has a rear edge/section that
returns to the frame, reducing airflow between
the fairing and frame (or sealing the fairing to
the frame) then slots/notches may be removed
from that area only. No material can be removed
from the lateral (side) surfaces of the fairing. A
maximum of 50% of the rear face may be
removed.
p. A Gurney flap (lip/deflector) may be fitted at the
edge of the lateral air vents or the rear edge of
the fairing to increase vent effectiveness. The
gurney flap may project a maximum of 4mm
from the lateral surface of the fairing and must
have a rounded end. It should be formed from
the same material and be a molded part of the
fairing. The Technical Directors decision on
suitability is final.
q. The front mudguard must conform in principle to
the homologated shape originally produced by the
manufacturer.
r. Holes may be drilled in the front mudguard to
allow additional cooling. Holes bigger than 10mm
must be covered with metal gauze or fine mesh.
Mesh must be painted to match the surrounding
material.
s. A rear mudguard may be added or removed.
t. Material of construction of the front mudguard, rear
mudguard and fairing is free.
2.4.10.12 Seat
a. Seat may be altered or replaced from those
fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
b. The appearance from front, rear and profile must
conform in principle to the homologated shape.
c. The top portion of the rear body work around the
seat may be modified to a solo seat.
Page 81 of 213
d. Holes may be drilled in the seat or rear cowl to
allow additional cooling. Holes which are bigger
than 10mm must be covered with metal gauze or
fine mesh. Mesh must be painted to match the
surrounding material.
e. Material of construction of the seat is free .
f. All exposed edges must be rounded.
2.4.10.13 Rear Safety Light
All motorcycles must have a functioning red light
mounted at the rear of the machine. This light must
be switched on any time the motorcycle is on the
track or being ridden in the pit lane and the session
is declared WET. All lights must comply with the
following:
a. Lighting direction must be parallel to the machine
center line (motorcycle running direction), and be
clearly visible from the rear at least 15 degrees to
both left and right sides of the machine center line.
b. The rear light must be mounted near the end of the
seat/rear bodywork and approximately on the
machine center line, in a position approved by the
MotoAmerica Technical Director. In case of dispute
over the mounting position or visibility, the decision
of the MotoAmerica Technical Director will be final.
c. Power
output/luminosity
equivalent
to
approximately: 10 – 15 (incandescent), 0.6 – 1.8 W
(LED).
d. The output must be continuous - no flashing safety
light whilst on track, flashing is allowed in the pit lane
when pit limiter is active.
e. Safety light power supply may be separated from the
motorcycle. The power switch must be accessible.
f. The MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right to
refuse any light system not satisfying this safety
purpose.
2.4.11
The following items MAY BE altered or
replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle.
a. Any type of lubrication, brake or suspension fluid
may be used.
b. Gaskets and gasket material.
c. Bearings (ball, roller, taper, plain, etc.) of any type
or brand may be used.
d. Fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws, etc.), internal
engine bolts must remain of standard homologated
materials or materials of higher specific weight.
Page 82 of 213
e. Thread repair may be made using inserts of
different material such as Helicoils and
Timeserts.
f. External surface finishes and decals.
2.4.12
The following items MAY BE removed
a. Instrument and instrument bracket and associated
cables.
b. Tachometer.
c. Speedometer and associated wheel spacers.
d. Chain guard.
2.4.13
The following Items MUST BE Removed
a. Headlamp, rear lamp and turn signal indicators
(when not incorporated in the fairing). Openings
must be covered by suitable materials.
b. Rear-view mirrors.
c. Horn.
d. License plate bracket.
e. Tool box.
f. Helmet hooks and luggage carrier hooks
g. Passenger foot rests.
h. Passenger grab rails.
i. Safety bars, center and side stands must be
removed (fixed brackets must remain).
2.4.14
The following items MUST BE altered
a. All drain plugs must be wired. External oil filter(s)
screws and bolts that enter an oil cavity must be
safety wired (i.e. on crankcases).
b. Where breather or overflow pipes are fitted they
must discharge via existing outlets. The original
closed system must be retained; no direct
atmospheric emission is permitted.
c. Motorcycles must be equipped with a red light on the
instrument panel that will illuminate in the event of oil
pressure drop.
Page 83 of 213
SUPERSPORT TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.5.10
2.5.11
2.5.12
2.5.13
2.5.14
SUPERSPORT TECH REGULATIONS
MOTORCYCLE SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE CONFIGURATIONS
BALANCING CONCEPTS
MINIMUM WEIGHT
NUMBERS & NUMBER PLATES
FUEL
TIRES
ENGINE
ELECTRICS & ELECTRONICS
MAIN FRAME
ITEMS MAY BE ALTERED/ REPLACED
ITEMS THAT MAY BE REMOVED
ITEMS THAT MUST BE REMOVED
ITEMS THAT MUST BE ALTERED
Page 84 of 213
84
84
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
93
96
106
107
107
107
2.5
SUPERSPORT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following rules are intended to give freedom to
modify or replace some parts in the interest of
safety, research and development and improved
competition between various motorcycle concepts.
EVERYTHING THAT IS NOT AUTHORIZED AND
PRESCRIBED IN THIS RULE IS STRICTLY
FORBIDDEN
If a change to a part or system is not specifically
allowed in any of the following articles, then it is
forbidden
Supersport motorcycles require an FIM homologation
(see Art. 2.15). All motorcycles must comply in every
respect with all requirements for road racing as
specified in these Technical Regulations, unless they
are already equipped as such on the homologated
model.
For 2017: 2013-2017 Kawasaki ZX-6R (636) is
accepted as homologated for MotoAmerica
competition.
The appearance from the front, rear and the profile
of Supersport motorcycles must (except when
otherwise stated) conform in principle to the
homologated shape (as originally produced by the
manufacturer). The appearance of the exhaust
system is excluded from this rule.
2.5.1
Motorcycle specifications
All parts and systems not specifically mentioned in
the following articles must remain as originally
produced by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle.
2.5.2
Engine configurations and displacement
capacities
The following engine configurations comprise the
Supersport class.
Over 400cc up to 600cc
Over 500cc up to 675cc
4 stroke
4 stroke
4 cylinders
3 cylinders
Over 600cc up to 750cc
4 stroke
2 cylinders
The displacement capacity bore and stroke must
remain at the homologated size. Modifying the bore
and stroke to reach class limits is not allowed.
2.5.3
Balancing various motorcycle concepts
In order to equalize the performance of
motorcycles used in the Supersport Championship,
A system of performance enhancements or
restrictions can be developed. (Such as minimum
weight, air restrictor or REV Limit may be applied
Page 85 of 213
according to their respective racing performances.)
The decision to apply a balancing system to a
motorcycle will be taken by the MotoAmerica
Permanent Bureau based on decisions made by
the Superbike Commission at any time deemed
necessary to ensure fair competition.
2.5.4
Minimum weight
The minimum weight will be:
600cc
4 cylinders
161kg (354.2lb)
675cc
750cc
3 cylinders
2 cylinders
161kg (354.2lb)
161kg (354.2lb)
For 2017: 2013-2017 Kawasaki ZX-6R (636)
minimum weight - 163 kg (358.6 lbs)
At any time during the event, the weight of the whole
motorcycle (including the tank and its contents) must
not be less than the minimum weight.
There is no tolerance on the minimum weight of the
motorcycle.
During the final technical inspection at the end of the
race, the selected motorcycles will be weighed in
the condition they finished the race, and the
established weight limit must be met in this condition.
Nothing may be added to the motorcycle. This
includes all fluids.
During the practice and qualifying sessions, riders
may be asked to submit their motorcycle to a weight
control. In all cases the rider must comply with
this request.
The use of ballast is allowed to stay over the
minimum weight limit and may be required due to
the handicap system. The use of ballast and weight
handicap must be declared to the MotoAmerica
Technical Director at the preliminary checks.
2.5.5
Numbers and number plates
The background colors and figures (numbers) for
Supersport are a white background with blue
(pantone 298c) numbers:
The sizes for all the front numbers are:
Minimum height:
140 mm
Minimum width:
80 mm
Minimum stroke:
25 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
Page 86 of 213
The sizes for all the side numbers are:
Minimum height:
120 mm
Minimum width:
70 mm
Minimum stroke:
20 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
The allocated number (& plate) for the rider must be
affixed on the motorcycle as follows:
a. Once on the front, either in the center of the fairing
or slightly off to one side. The number must be
centered on the white background with no
advertising within 25mm in all directions.
b. Once on each side of the lower rear portion of the
lower fairing. The number must be centered on the
white background. Any change to this position must
be pre-approved a minimum of 2 weeks before the
first race by the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
c. The numbers must use the fonts as detailed in Art.
2.14. Any numbers not using these fonts must have
the design of the numbers and the layout preapproved by the MotoAmerica Technical Director a
minimum of 2 weeks before the first race. All digits
must be of standard form.
d. Any outlines must be of a contrasting color and the
maximum width of the outline is 3mm. The
background color must be clearly visible around all
edges of the number (including outline). Reflective
or mirror type numbers are not permitted.
e. Numbers cannot overlap.
In case of a dispute concerning the legibility of
numbers, the decision of the MotoAmerica
Technical Director will be final.
2.5.6
Fuel
Refer to Article: 2.9
2.5.7
Tires
a. The maximum number of tires, of any type,
available to each rider during the event will be
specified in Article: 2.3.7
b. A maximum of 10 tires per rider can be mounted at
any time.
c. For both Supersport races only, Wet and
Intermediate tires will not need to be marked
with a tire sticker. They will not be considered
in the total number of tires available for use
However normal allocation limits still apply.
Page 87 of 213
d. Every tire used during the event must be marked
with an adhesive sticker with a number allocated
by the MotoAmerica Technical Director. The
sticker will be a different color front and rear.
e. The tire stickers will be delivered to the teams
in a sealed envelope, on the day before the first
practice after which the teams will be responsible
for their use.
f. The stickers must be applied to the left sidewall
of the tire. Officials will check that all the
motorcycles in the pit lane are fitted with tires
carrying the sticker.
g. The use of motorcycles without the official
stickers will be immediately reported to the Race
Direction whom will take appropriate action.
h. Any modification or treatment (cutting, grooving) is
forbidden.
i. At the beginning of the event, the Official
Supplier may be requested by the MotoAmerica
Technical Director to deliver to him four (4)
samples of each type of tire to be used at the
event.
j. The allocation of individual tires will be made on a
random basis, with no involvement of any
representative from the tire supplier, teams or
riders. Those tires will be individually identified
and may not be exchanged between riders,
including between team mates, and may not
be exchanged by the tire supplier after the
allocation, except with the permission of the
Race Direction.
k. In exceptional cases, should the sticker be
damaged or applied in the wrong way, up to 2
extra stickers may be provided at the sole
discretion of the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
However, the damaged sticker must be returned
to the MotoAmerica Technical Director and/or the
tire it was applied to, must be absolutely intact.
2.5.8
Engine
2.5.8.1
Fuel injection system
Fuel injection systems refer to throttle bodies, fuel
injectors, variable length intake tract devices, fuel
pump and fuel pressure regulator.
a. The original homologated fuel injection system
must be used without any modification.
b. The fuel injectors must be stock and unaltered
from the original specification and manufacture.
Page 88 of 213
c. Air funnels (including their fixing points) may be
altered or replaced.
d. Butterflies cannot be changed or modified.
e. Variable intake tract devices cannot be added if
they are not present on the homologated
motorcycle and they must remain identical and
operate in the same way as the homologated
system. All parts of the variable intake tract device
must remain exactly as homologated. Variable
intake tract devices may be replaced with fixed
air funnels.
f. Vacuum slides may be fixed in the open position.
g. Secondary throttle valves and shafts may be
removed or fixed in the open position and the
electronics may be disconnected or removed.
h. Air and air/fuel mixture must go to the
combustion chamber exclusively through the
throttle body butterflies.
i. Electronically controlled throttle valves, known as
‘ride-by-wire’, may only be used if the homologated
model is equipped with the same system.
Software may be modified but all safety systems
and
procedures designed by the original
manufacturer must be maintained.
2.5.8.2
Cylinder head
Cylinder head must be as homologated. The following
modifications are allowed:
a. Porting and polishing of the cylinder head normally
associated with individual tuning such as gas
flowing of the cylinder head, including the
combustion chamber is allowed. Welding is not
allowed. No machining or modification is allowed in
the cam box / valve mechanism area.
b. The throttle body insulators may be modified.
c. Modifications of the inlet and exhaust ports by
taking off or adding material (welding is forbidden)
epoxy may be used to shape the ports.
d. Surface grinding of the cylinder head surface on the
head gasket side.
e. Original homologated valves guides may be cut
or modified, but only on the intake or exhaust port
side.
f. Polishing of the combustion chamber.
g. Original valve seats must be used,
modifications are allowed to the shape.
Page 89 of 213
but
h. Compression ratio is free, but the combustion
chamber may be modified only by taking material
off.
i. It is forbidden to add any material to the
cylinder head unless as described above.
j. Rocker arms (if any) must remain as homologated.
k. The Valves must remain as homologated.
l. Valve springs may be changed but
number must remain as homologated.
the
m. Valve spring retainers may be replaced or
modified, but their weight must be the same as, or
higher than, the original parts.
n. The shim buckets / tappets must remain as
homologated.
2.5.8.3
Camshaft
a. The method of drive must remain as homologated.
b. The duration is free but the maximum lift must
remain as homologated.
c. At the technical checks: for direct cam drive
systems, the cam lobe lift is measured; for nondirect cam drive systems (i.e. with rocker arms),
the valve lift is measured.
2.5.8.4
Cam sprockets or cam gears
a. Camshaft sprockets, pulleys or gears may be
altered or replaced to allow degreeing of the
camshafts (see also Art. 2.5.8).
b. The cam chain or cam belt tensioning device(s)
can be modified or changed.
2.5.8.5
Cylinders
a. Cylinders must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with only the following
modification allowed:
b. Cylinder head gasket surface may be machined
to allow the adjustment of compression ratio or
resurfacing to repair a warped cylinder surface
deck.
c. Homologated
materials
and
castings
for
cylinders must be used. The surface finish of
the cylinder bore must remain as homologated.
2.5.8.6
Pistons
a. Pistons must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with no modification allowed.
b. Polishing and lightening is not allowed.
2.5.8.7
Piston rings
Page 90 of 213
a. Piston rings must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with no modification allowed.
2.5.8.8
Piston pins and clips
a. Piston pins and clips must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with no modification allowed.
2.5.8.9
Connecting rods
a. Connecting rod assembly must be the originally
fitted and homologated parts with no modification
allowed.
2.5.8.10 Crankshaft
a. Crankshaft must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with no modification allowed.
b. Polishing and lightening is not allowed.
c. Modifications of the flywheels are not allowed.
2.5.8.11 Crankcase / Gearbox housing
a. Crankcases must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with no modification allowed.
b. It is not allowed to add a pump used to create a
vacuum in the crankcase. If a vacuum pump is
installed on the homologated motorcycle then it
may be used only as homologated.
2.5.8.11.1 Lateral covers and protection
a. Lateral (side) covers may be altered, modified or
replaced. If altered or modified, the cover must
have at least the same resistance to impact as
the original. If replaced, the cover must be made
in material of same or higher specific weight and
the total weight of the cover must not be less than
the original.
b. Titanium bolts may be used to fasten lateral covers.
c. All lateral covers/engine cases containing oil and
which could be in contact with the ground during
a crash, must be either replaced by a ‘heavier’
engine cover or protected by a second cover made
from metal such as aluminum alloy, stainless steel,
steel or titanium, or an approved cover.
d. The secondary cover must cover a minimum of 1/3
of the original cover. It must have no sharp edges
to damage the track surface. The Technical
Directors decision on suitability is final.
e. Plates or crash bars made from aluminum or
steel also are permitted in addition to these
covers. All of these devices must be designed
to be resistant against sudden shocks, abrasions
and crash damage.
Page 91 of 213
f. FIM approved covers will be permitted without
regard of the material or dimensions.
g. These covers must be fixed properly and securely
with a minimum of three (3) case cover screws
that also mount the original covers/engine cases to
the crankcases.
h. Oil containing engine case cannot be secured with
aluminum bolts.
i. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
cover not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.5.8.12 Transmission / Gearbox
a. Stock transmission shafts and gear set only.
Shimming is allowed.
b. Undercutting and surface treatments are permitted.
c. Quick-shift systems are allowed (including wire and
potentiometer).
d. Countershaft sprocket, rear wheel sprocket, chain
pitch and size may be changed.
e. The sprocket cover may be modified or eliminated.
f. Chain guard as long as it is not incorporated in
the rear fender may be removed.
2.5.8.13 Clutch
a. Aftermarket or modified clutches are permitted.
b. Back torque limiter is permitted.
c. Friction and drive discs may be changed.
d. Clutch springs may be changed.
e. No power source (i.e. hydraulic or electric) can be
used for gear selection, if not installed in the
homologated model for road use. Human power
is excluded from the ban.
f. Clutch system (wet or dry type) and the method of
operation (by cable or hydraulic) must remain as
homologated.
g. The clutch basket (outer) must be the originally
fitted and homologated part but may be
reinforced.
2.5.8.14 Oil pumps and oil lines
a. The originally fitted and homologated oil pump may
be modified but the oil pump housing, mounting
points and oil feed points must remain as original.
b. Oil lines may be modified or replaced. Oil lines
containing positive pressure, if replaced, must be
of metal reinforced construction with swaged or
treaded connectors.
Page 92 of 213
2.5.8.15 Radiator / Oil cooler
a. The only liquid engine coolants permitted is
water.
b. The radiator may be changed with an aftermarket
radiator or additional radiator that fits in the
standard location and does not require any
modifications to the main frame or to the fairings’
outer appearance.
c. Modifications to the homologated oil-cooler are
allowed only if they do not require any
modifications to the main frame or to the fairings’
outer appearance. A heat exchanger (oil/water)
may be replaced with an oil-cooler.
d. The cooling system hoses and catch tanks may be
changed.
e. Radiator fan and wiring may be changed, modified
or removed.
f. Additional oil coolers are not allowed.
g. The oil cooler must not be mounted on or above the
rear mudguard.
2.5.8.16 Air box
a. The air box must remain as originally produced
by the manufacturer on the homologated
motorcycle.
b. The air filter element may be removed or
replaced but if fitted must be mounted in the
original position.
c. The air box drains must be sealed.
d. All motorcycles must have a closed breather
system. All oil breather lines must be connected
(may pass through an oil catch tank) and discharge
in the air box only.
e. Ram air tubes or ducts running from the fairing
to the air box may be modified, replaced or
removed. If tubes/ducts are utilized, they must be
attached to the original, unmodified air box inlets.
f. No heat protection may be attached to the air
box. (i.e. foil heat tape).
2.5.8.17 Fuel supply
a. Fuel pump and fuel pressure regulator must remain
as homologated.
b. The fuel pressure must be as homologated.
c. Fuel lines from the fuel tank up to the injectors (fuel
hoses, delivery pipe assembly, joints, clamps, fuel
canister) may be replaced and must be located in
Page 93 of 213
such a way that they are protected from crash
damage.
d. Quick connectors or dry break connectors may be
used.
e. Fuel vent lines may be replaced.
f. Fuel filters may be added.
2.5.8.18 Exhaust system
a. Exhaust pipes and silencers may be altered or
replaced from those fitted on the homologated
motorcycle. Catalytic converters must be removed.
b. The number of final exhaust silencer(s) must remain
as homologated. The silencer(s) must be on the
same side(s) as on the homologated model.
c. For safety reasons, the exposed edge(s) of the
exhaust pipe(s) outlet(s) must be rounded to avoid
any sharp edges.
d. Wrapping of exhaust systems is not allowed
except in the area of the rider’s foot or an area
in contact with the fairing for protection from heat.
e. The noise limit for Supersport will be 107 dB/A
(with a 3 dB/A tolerance after the race only). The
test will be carried out according to the details noted
in Art 2.13.
2.5.9
Electrics and electronics
2.5.9.1
Ignition / Engine Control System (ECU)
a. The engine control system (ECU) must be an ECU
(Kit or OEM) applicable to the specific homologated
model. The ECU may have its software changed,
but the ECU may not be physically modified.
b. The system may have FIM/DWO/MotoAmerica
approved external ignition and/or injection
module/s added.
c. The total combined retail price (software and
tuning tools included) on sale to the general
public cannot be higher than €2500 (tax
excluded).
d. Central unit (ECU) may be relocated.
e. Optional equipment sold by the motorcycle
Manufacturer for the homologated model is
considered not homologated with the bike and
must follow the requirements for approved
electronics/data loggers.
f. During an event the Technical Director has the
right to ask a team to substitute their ECU or
external module with the sample received from the
Page 94 of 213
Manufacturer. The change has to be done before
Sunday warm up.
g. No extra sensors may be added for control
strategies except shift rod sensor, wheel speed
sensors and lambda sensors. Wheel speed
sensors must be included in the Kit ECU and
Harness package if required.
h. Other additional electronic hardware equipment
not on the original homologated motorcycle
cannot be added with the exceptions noted
below.
i. The characteristics of approved data logging
systems must be the following:
1. Maximum retail price of the unit (hardware +
software, excluding
sensors and wiring
harness) cannot exceed €3000 Euro (VAT
excluded) if it is a standalone unit.
2. The Data Logger unit must be available for sale
to the public and
on
the
list
of
FIM/DWO/MotoAmerica approved data loggers.
3. A maximum of 7 simultaneous working sensors
(connected to the additional data logger) may
be added to the original sensors on the
motorcycle.
4. The sensors must be simple-function. No
inertial platforms are allowed (if an inertial
platform is not installed originally on the
homologated motorcycle).
5. Type of sensor is free.
6. Communication from the ECU to an approved
data logger (logger can receive data only, no
data transmission is allowed) is allowed without
any limitation in CAN channel logger number.
j. The maximum total price of other active / control /
calculation units such as lambda driver modules,
quick shifter, analogue to CAN, air bleed control
and traction control units is €750. These
devices
must
be
approved
by
FIM/DWO/MotoAmerica.
k. The addition of a device for infra-red (IR)
transmission of a signal between the racing rider
and his team, used exclusively for lap timing, is
allowed and considered in the 7 sensors.
l. The addition of a GPS unit for lap timing/scoring
purposes is allowed and considered in the 7
sensors.
m.Telemetry is not allowed.
Page 95 of 213
n. No remote or wireless connection to the bike for any
data exchange or setting is allowed whilst the
engine is running or the bike is moving.
o. Harness:
1. The main wiring harness may be replaced by
the kit wire harness as supplied for the Kit
ECU model, produced and/or approved by the
manufacturer of the motorcycle and by
FIM/DWO/MotoAmerica. The Kit wiring harness
may incorporate the data logging harness.
2. A kit harness that incorporates the data
logging harness may only accommodate 7
additional sensors.
3. A sample of the kit wiring harness may be
requested by the FIM/MotoAmerica.
4. The key/ignition lock may be relocated, replaced
or removed.
5. Cutting of the original main wiring harness is
allowed.
p. The Data Logger wire harness cannot include any
other sensors with the exception of the seven
sensors that are allowed. The only function of the
approved Data Logger wire harness is to connect
the seven sensors to the Data Logger, to transmit
the data and supply the power.
q. For the Superstock Kit to be approved, samples
of the ECU kits, kit harnesses and external
modules with their tuning tools must be sent by
the Manufacturers to the MotoAmerica Technical
Director, with technical data and selling price.
r. For the ignition and or injection module, quick
shifter or stand- alone data logger to be approved,
samples must be sent by the manufacturer of the
device to the MotoAmerica Technical Director with
technical data and selling price.
s. The original speedometer and tachometer may be
altered or replaced (see also 2.5.11).
t. Electric cables, connectors,
switches are free.
battery
and
u. Spark plugs, plug caps, coils and wires may be
replaced.
2.5.9.2
Generator, alternator, electric starter
a. The generator (ACG) must remain as homologated
– no modifications allowed.
b. The stator must be fitted in its original position
and without offsetting.
Page 96 of 213
c. The electric starter must operate normally and
always be able to start the engine during the event.
d. During parc fermé the starter must crank the
engine at a suitable speed for starting for a
minimum of 2 seconds without the use of a
boost battery. No boost battery may be
connected to the machine after the end of the
session.
2.5.10
Main frame and pre-assembled spare frame
During the entire duration of the event, each rider can
only use one (1) complete motorcycle, as presented
for Technical Control, with the frame clearly identified
with a seal. In case the frame needs to be replaced,
the rider or the team can request the use of a spare
frame to the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
The pre-assembled spare frame must be presented to
the MotoAmerica Technical Director to receive the
permission to rebuild the motorcycle. The preassembly of the frame shall be strictly limited to:
a. Main frame
b. Bearings (steering pipe, swing arm, etc.)
c. Swing arm
d. Rear suspension linkage and shock absorber
e. Upper and lower triple clamps
f. Wiring harness
The spare frame will not be allowed in the pit box
before the rider or the team has received authorization
from the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
The motorcycle, once rebuilt, must be inspected
before its use by the technical stewards for safety
checks and a new seal will be placed on the
motorcycle frame.
No complete spare machine may be at the track. If
found penalties will be applied. For the remainder
of the event the machine will be impounded and
no part of that machine may be used for spare
parts.
Explanation of Procedures
Only one (1) complete motorcycle may be presented
for the preliminary technical checks and it will be the
only motorcycle allowed on the track and in the pit box
during the practices, qualifying, warm up and race.
The frame of this motorcycle will be officially sealed by
the MotoAmerica Technical Director or by his
appointed staff. The seal will bear a serial number,
which will be recorded. Any attempt made to remove
the seal will damage it irreparably.
Page 97 of 213
At any time during the event the technical stewards,
under the direction of the MotoAmerica Technical
Director, may check the seal and verify that it conforms
to the motorcycle and rider it was assigned to. For
cross reference, every frame must have a unique
number punched on it, preferably on the steeringhead.
If the motorcycle is damaged in a crash or in any other
incident, it is allowed to use the pre-assembled spare
frame to rebuild the motorcycle.
The spare frame may be pre-assembled with the
following items: main frame assembly, swing-arm, rear
suspension linkage, shock-absorber, steering head
bearings, upper and lower triple clamps and wiring
harness.
When a team decides that a crashed or damaged
motorcycle requires a change of frame, it must inform
the MotoAmerica Technical Director. Only at this point
may the pre-assembled spare frame be brought into
the pit box.
Parts may be transferred from the damaged
motorcycle for the assembly of the replacement
motorcycle.
Once the assembly of the replacement motorcycle is
completed, it will then undergo technical and safety
checks and it will be officially sealed. The seal on the
damaged motorcycle will be destroyed by the
technical staff and the chassis of this motorcycle must
not be used for the remainder of the event. The new
serial number will be recorded by the MotoAmerica
Technical Director.
The replacement motorcycle may be used on the track
only after the end of the practice and qualifying
sessions or race in which the damage occurred. The
damaged motorcycle must be removed from the pit
box as soon as possible and put in storage outside the
pit box.
After the pre-assembled spare part frame has been
used, should it become necessary to replace the frame
again because of a further crash or damage, the
assembly work must be done using a bare frame with
no components attached. The MotoAmerica Technical
Director must inspect the bare frame and give his
approval before work can start.
Any actions contrary to these procedures will result in
a penalty as described in the Sporting Regulations.
2.5.10.1 Frame body and rear sub-frame
a. The frame must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
Page 98 of 213
b. Holes may be drilled on the frame only to fix
approved components (i.e. fairing brackets,
steering damper mount, sensors).
c. The sides of the frame-body may be covered by a
protective part made of a composite material.
These protectors must fit the form of the frame.
d. Nothing else may be added or removed from the
frame body.
e. All motorcycles must display a vehicle
identification number punched on the frame body.
f. Engine mounting brackets or plates must remain as
originally produced by the manufacturer for the
homologated motorcycle.
g. Front sub frame / fairing mount may be changed or
altered.
h. Rear sub frame may be changed or altered, but the
type of material must remain as homologated, or of
higher specific weight.
i. Additional seat brackets may be added, nonstressed protruding brackets may be removed if
they do not affect the safety of the construction
or assembly. Bolt-on accessories to the rear subframe may be removed.
j. The paint scheme is not restricted but polishing
the frame body or sub- frame is not allowed.
2.5.10.2 Suspension - General
a. Participants in the Supersport class must only use
the approved and listed suspension units for that
season. The price limits are:
1. Fork: For the fork kit, including all parts
such as but not limited to cartridge, springs
(1 set), adjusters, fork caps, blanking inserts,
seals, bushes but excepting oil and fitting
the price limit is €2200 excluding tax.
2. Shock Absorber/RCU: For the complete
shock absorber / RCU including but not
limited to spring (1), pre-load adjuster and
length/ride height adjuster the price limit is
€2000 excluding tax.
b. The approved products from the suspension
manufacturers must be available to all participants
at least one month before the first round of the
MotoAmerica Superbike season, and remain
available all season. The products must be
available within 6 weeks of a confirmed order.
c. Setting parts and tuning parts must be provided by
the suspension manufacturers to all customers/
teams/ participants using the manufacturer’s
Page 99 of 213
products. These parts can be used by all
participants during the season. These parts shall
be available for immediate delivery to all
teams/customers.
d. Teams may not modify any part of the forks or
shock absorber; all setting parts must be supplied
by the Suspension manufacturer and available to
all teams/riders.
e. The suspension manufacturers are allowed to offer
service contracts when the team is using the
approved and listed suspension products. The
suspension manufacturers cannot demand a
service contract for a customer or participant in
order to obtain a suspension product.
1. No aftermarket or prototype electronicallycontrolled suspensions maybe used.
Electronically-controlled suspension may only
be used if already present on the production
model of the homologated motorcycle.
2. The electronically-controlled valves must remain
as homologated. The shims, spacers and
fork/shock springs not connected with these
valves can be changed.
3. The ECU for the electronic suspension must
remain as homologated and cannot receive any
motorcycle track position or sector information;
the suspension cannot be adjusted relative to
track position.
4. The electronic interface between the rider and
the suspension must remain as on the
homologated motorcycle. It is allowed to remove
or disable this rider interface.
5. The original suspension system must work
safely in the event of an electronic failure.
6. Electro-magnetic fluid systems which change
the viscosity of the suspension fluid(s) during
operation are not permitted.
f. Electronic controlled steering damper cannot be
used if not installed in the homologated model for
road use. However, it must be completely standard
(any mechanical or electronic part must remain as
homologated).
2.5.10.3 Front Suspension
a. Forks must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with the following modifications
allowed:
b. Original internal parts of the homologated forks
may be modified or changed.
Page 100 of 213
c. After market damper kits or valves may be
installed.
d. Fork springs may be modified or replaced.
e. Fork caps may be modified or replaced to allow
external adjustment.
f. Dust seals may be modified, changed or removed
if the fork is totally oil- sealed.
g. The original surface finish of the fork tubes
(stanchions, fork pipes) may be changed.
Additional surface treatments are allowed.
h. The upper and lower fork clamps (triple clamp, fork
bridges, and stem) must remain as originally
produced by the manufacturer on the homologated
motorcycle.
i. A steering damper may be added or replaced with
an aftermarket damper.
j. The steering damper cannot act as a steering lock
limiting device.
k. Electronic forks may have their complete internal
parts (including all electronic control) replaced with
a conventional damping system and it will be
considered as a mechanical fork.
2.5.10.4 Rear fork (swing arm)
a. The rear fork must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed
except the following:
1. A chain guard must be fitted in such a way to
reduce the possibility that any part of the
riders’ body may become trapped between the
lower chain run and the rear wheel sprocket.
2. Rear wheel stand brackets may be added to the
rear fork by welding or by bolts. Brackets must
have rounded edges (with a large radius).
Fastening screws must be recessed. An
anchorage system or point(s) to keep the
original rear brake caliper in place may be added
to the rear swing-arm.
3. Rear axle chain adjuster slot may be enlarged
to allow the brake caliper bracket mounting to
become captive by use of a sleeve. The slot
may only be modified on the side the rear
brake caliper is located. The enlarged slot may
not increase or decrease the original wheel
base.
4. The sides of the swing-arm may be protected
by a thin vinyl cover only, no composite or
structural covers are allowed.
Page 101 of 213
b. Rear fork pivot bolt must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed.
c. Rear axle chain adjuster may be modified or
changed.
2.5.10.5 Rear suspension unit
a. Rear suspension unit (shock absorber) may be
changed or modified. The original attachments of
the frame and rear fork must be as homologated.
b. All the rear suspension linkage parts must be the
originally fitted and homologated parts with no
modification allowed.
c. Removable top shock mounts must remain as
homologated. A nut may be made captive on the top
shock mount and shim spacers may be fitted behind
it.
2.5.10.6 Wheels
a. Wheels must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with no modification allowed.
b. A non-slip coating / treatment may be applied to the
bead area of the rim.
c. If the original design included a cushion drive for the
rear wheel, it must remain as originally produced for
the homologated motorcycle.
d. Wheel axles must remain as homologated, wheel
spacers may be modified or replaced.
e. The speedometer drive may be removed and
replaced with a spacer.
f. Wheel balance weights may be discarded, changed
or added to.
g. Any inflation valves may be used.
2.5.10.7 Brakes
a. Front and rear brake discs may be replaced with
aftermarket brake discs that must fit the original
caliper and mounting. However, the outside
diameter and the ventilation system must
remain the same as on the homologated
motorcycle. Internally ventilated discs are not
allowed if not present on the homologated
motorcycle.
b. The brake disc carriers may be changed, but they
must retain the same off set and same type of
mounting to the wheels of the homologated
motorcycle.
c. Only steel (max. carbon content 2.1 wt. %) is
allowed for brake discs.
Page 102 of 213
d. Front and rear brake calipers as well as all
the mounting points and mounting hardware
(mount, carrier, hanger) must remain as
originally produced by the manufacturer for the
homologated motorcycle (see Art. 2.5.10.4.a.2/3).
e. In order to reduce the transfer of heat to the
hydraulic fluid it is permitted to add metallic-shims
to the calipers, between the pads and the calipers,
and/or to replace light alloy pistons with steel
pistons made by the same manufacturer of the
caliper.
f. The front brake master cylinder may be replaced.
g. The rear brake master cylinder must be the
originally fitted and homologated parts with no
modification allowed.
h. Front and rear hydraulic brake lines may be
changed. The brake fluid reservoir may be replaced
and/or repositioned. Quick connectors may be
used. The split of the front brake lines for both front
brake calipers must be made above the lower edge
of the fork bridge (lower triple clamp).
i. Front and rear brake pads may be changed. Brake
pad locking pins may be modified for quick change
type.
j. Additional air ducts are not allowed.
k. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) must be
removed.
l. Motorcycles must be equipped with brake lever
protection, intended to protect the handlebar
brake lever from being accidentally activated in
case of collision with another motorcycle.
Composite guards are not permitted. FIM approved
guards will be permitted without regard to the
material. Only composite guards need to be
approved. The Technical Director has the right to
refuse any guard not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.5.10.8 Handlebars and hand controls
a. Handlebars may be replaced.
b. Handlebars and hand controls may be relocated.
c. Throttle controls must be self-closing when not held
by the hand.
d. Throttle assembly and associated cables may be
modified or replaced but the connection to the
throttle body and to the throttle controls must
remain as on the homologated motorcycle.
e. Clutch and brake lever may be replaced with an
after-market model. An adjuster to the brake lever
is allowed.
Page 103 of 213
f. Switches may be changed but the electric starter
switch and engine stop switch must be located on
the handlebars.
g. Motorcycles must be equipped with a functional
ignition kill switch or button mounted on the
right hand handlebar (within reach of the hand
while on the hand grips) that is capable of stopping
a running engine. The button or switch must be
RED.
2.5.10.9 Foot rest and foot controls
a. Foot rest hangers/brackets and hardware may
be
replaced
and
relocated
but
the
hangers/brackets must be mounted to their
original frame mounting points.
b. Foot controls; gear shift and rear brake must
remain operated manually by foot.
c. Foot rests may be rigidly mounted or a folding
type which must incorporate a device to return
them to the normal position.
d. The end of the foot rest must have at least
an 8 mm solid spherical radius.
e. Non folding footrests must have an end (plug)
which is permanently fixed, made of aluminum,
plastic, Teflon® or an equivalent type material
(minimum radius 8mm). The plug surface must be
designed to reach the widest possible area. The
MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right to
refuse any plug not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.5.10.10 Fuel tank
a. Fuel tank must be the originally fitted and
homologated parts with no modification allowed.
b. All fuel tanks must be completely filled with fire
retardant material (i .e . f ue l ta nk f o am ) .
c. Fuel tanks with tank breather pipes must be fitted
with non-return valves that discharge into a catch
tank with a minimum volume of 250 cc made of a
suitable material.
d. Fuel caps may be changed. Fuel caps when
closed, must be leak proof. Additionally, they must
be securely locked to prevent accidental opening
at any time.
e. A rider spacer/pad may be fitted to the rear of
the tank with non-permanent adhesive. It may
be constructed of foam padding or composite
material.
f. The tank may not have a cover fitted over it
unless the homologated machine also features
a full cover.
Page 104 of 213
g. The sides of the fuel tank may be protected with
a cover made of a composite material. These
covers must fit the shape of the fuel tank.
h. Fuel tank may have heat reflective sheet
attached to its bottom surface.
2.5.10.11 Fairing / Bodywork
a. Fairing, mudguards and body work must conform
in principle to the homologated shape as originally
produced by the manufacturer. The use of carbon
fiber or Kevlar® materials is not allowed in
fairing, fuel tank cover, seat, seat base and
associated bodywork construction. Specific
reinforcements in Kevlar® or carbon are allowed
locally around holes and stressed areas.
Headlights must be included even when
considered external.
b. Wind screen may be replaced.
c. The ram-air intake must maintain the originally
homologated shape and dimensions.
d. Original air ducts running between the fairing to the
airbox may be altered or replaced from those fitted
to the homologated motorcycle.
e. The lower fairing has to be constructed to hold,
in case of an engine breakdown, at least half of
the total oil and engine coolant capacity used in
the engine (min. 5 liters). The lower edge of
openings in the fairing must be positioned at least
50 mm above the bottom of the fairing.
f. The lower fairing must incorporate one hole of 25
mm in the bottom of the front lower area. This hole
must remain closed in dry conditions and must be
only opened in wet race conditions, as declared by
the Race Director.
g. Minimal changes are allowed in the fairing to
allow clearance for protective engine covers.
h. Holes may be drilled or cut in the fairing or
bodywork to allow additional increased intake air
to the oil cooler. Holes bigger than 10mm must
be covered with a particle grill or fine wire mesh.
Grill/mesh must be painted to match the
surrounding material.
i. Original openings for cooling in the lateral
fairing/bodywork sections may be partially closed
only to accommodate sponsors' logos/lettering.
Such modification shall be made using wire
mesh or perforated plate. The material is free
but the distance between all opening centers, circle
centers and their diameters must be constant.
Holes or perforations must have an open area ratio
> 60%.
Page 105 of 213
j. Motorcycles may be equipped with a radiator
shroud to improve the air stream towards the
radiator but the appearance of the front, the rear
and the profile of the motorcycle must not be
changed.
k. Front mudguards may be replaced with a
cosmetic duplicate of the original parts and may
be spaced upward for increased tire clearance.
The use of carbon fiber or Kevlar® composites
are allowed.
l. Rear mudguard fixed on the swing-arm may
be modified, changed or removed. The use of
carbon fiber or Kevlar® composites are
allowed.
2.5.10.12 Seat
a. Seat, seat base and associated bodywork may be
replaced with parts of similar appearance as
originally produced by the manufacturer for the
homologated motorcycles.
b. The top portion of the rear body work around the
seat may be modified to a solo seat.
c. Holes may be drilled in the seat or rear cowl to
allow additional cooling. Holes which are bigger
than 10 mm must be covered with metal gauze or
fine mesh. Mesh must be painted to match the
surrounding material.
d. The appearance from both front, rear and profile
must conform in principle to the homologated
shape.
e. Same material as fairing must be used. (Art.
2.5.10.11a)
f. All exposed edges must be rounded.
2.5.10.13 Rear Safety Light
All motorcycles must have a functioning red light
mounted at the rear of the machine, this light must
be switched on any time the motorcycle is on the
track or being ridden in the pit lane and the session
is declared WET. All lights must comply with the
following:
a. Lighting direction must be parallel to the machine
center line (motorcycle running direction), and be
clearly visible from the rear at least 15 degrees to
both left and right sides of the machine center line.
b. The rear light must be mounted near the end of
the seat/rear bodywork and approximately on the
machine center line, in a position approved by the
Technical Director. In case of dispute over the
Page 106 of 213
mounting position or visibility, the decision of the
Technical Director will be final.
c. Power
output/luminosity
equivalent
to
approximately: 10 – 15 (incandescent), 0.6 – 1.8 W
(LED).
d. The output must be continuous - no flashing
safety light whilst on track, flashing is allowed in
the pit lane when pit limiter is active.
e. Safety light power supply may be separated from
the motorcycle.
f. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
light system not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.5.10.14 Fasteners
a. Standard fasteners may be replaced
fasteners of any material and design.
with
b. Aluminum fasteners may only be used in nonstructural locations.
c. Titanium fasteners may be used in structural
locations, but the strength and design must be
equal to or exceed the strength of the standard
fastener it is replacing.
d. Special steel fasteners may be used in structural
locations, but the strength and design must be
equal to or exceed the strength of the standard
fastener it is replacing.
e. Fasteners may be drilled for safety wire, but
intentional weight-saving modifications are not
allowed.
f. Threads repairs may be made using inserts of
different material such as Helicoils and
Timeserts.
g. Fairing/bodywork fasteners may be changed to the
quick disconnect type.
2.5.11
The following items MAY BE altered or
replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle
a. Any type of lubrication, brake or suspension fluid.
b. Instruments, their supports(s) and associated
cables.
c. Bearings (ball, roller, taper, plain, etc.) of any type
or brand may be used.
d. Gaskets and gasket materials.
e. Painted external surface finishes and decals.
Page 107 of 213
f. Material for brackets connection non original parts
(faring, exhaust, instruments, etc.) to the frame (or
engine) cannot be made from titanium or fiber
reinforced composites excepting the exhaust
silencer hanger that may be in carbon.
2.5.12
The following items MAY BE removed
a. Emission control items (anti-pollution) in or around
the air box and engine (O2 sensors, air injection
devices).
b. Tachometer.
c. Speedometer and related wheel spacers.
d. Bolt on accessories on a rear sub frame.
2.5.13
The following items MUST BE removed
a. Headlamp, rear lamp and turn signal indicators
(when not incorporated in the fairing). Openings
must be covered by suitable materials.
b. Rear-view mirrors.
c. Horn.
d. License plate bracket.
e. Tool box.
f. Helmet hooks and luggage carrier hooks.
g. Passenger foot rests.
h. Passenger grab rails.
i. Safety bars, center and side stands must be
removed (fixed brackets must remain).
2.5.14
The following items MUST BE altered
a. All drain plugs must be wired. External oil filter(s)
screws and bolts that enter an oil cavity must be
safety wired (i.e. on crankcases).
b. Where breather or overflow pipes are fitted they
must discharge via existing outlets. The original
closed system must be retained; no direct
atmospheric emission is permitted.
c. Motorcycles must be equipped with a red light
on the instrument panel that will illuminate in the
event of oil pressure drop (Yamaha R6 exempt).
Page 108 of 213
SUPERSTOCK 1000 TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.6.7
2.6.8
2.6.9
2.6.10
2.6.11
2.6.12
2.6.13
2.6.14
SSTK 1000 TECH REGULATIONS
MOTORCYCLE SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE CONFIGURATIONS
BALANCING CONCEPTS
MINIMUM WEIGHT
NUMBERS & NUMBER PLATES
FUEL
TIRES
ENGINE
ELECTRICS & ELECTRONICS
MAIN FRAME
ITEMS MAY BE ALTERED/ REPLACED
ITEMS THAT MAY BE REMOVED
ITEMS THAT MUST BE REMOVED
ITEMS THAT MUST BE ALTERED
Page 109 of 213
109
109
109
109
110
110
111
111
112
117
119
131
131
131
132
2.6
SUPERSTOCK 1000 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following rules are intended to permit limited
changes to the homologated motorcycle in the
interests of safety and improved competition between
various motorcycle concepts.
EVERYTHING THAT IS NOT AUTHORIZED AND
PRESCRIBED IN THIS RULE IS STRICTLY
FORBIDDEN
If a change to a part or system is not specifically
allowed in any of the following articles, then it is
forbidden.
Superstock motorcycles require an FIM homologation
(see Art. 2.15). All motorcycles must comply in
every respect with all requirements for road racing
as specified in these Technical Regulations, unless
they are already equipped as such on the
homologated model.
The appearance from the front, rear and the profile
of Superstock motorcycles must (except when
otherwise stated) conform to the homologated
shape (as originally produced by the manufacturer).
The appearance of the exhaust system is excluded
from this rule.
2.6.1
Motorcycle specifications
All parts and systems not specifically mentioned in
the following articles must remain as originally
produced by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle.
2.6.2
Engine configurations and displacement
capacities
The following engine configurations comprise the
Superstock class:
Over 750cc up to 1000cc
4 stroke
3 & 4 cylinders
Over 850cc up to 1200cc
4 stroke
2 cylinders
The displacement capacity, bore and stroke (new),
must remain at the homologated size. Modifying
the bore and stroke to reach class limits is not
allowed.
2.6.3
Balancing various motorcycle concepts
In order to equalize the performance of
motorcycles used in the Superstock 1000
Championship,
A
system
of
performance
enhancements or restrictions can be developed.
(Such as minimum weight, air restrictor or REV
Limit may be applied according to their respective
racing performances.) The decision to apply a
balancing system to a motorcycle will be taken by the
MotoAmerica Permanent
Bureau
based
on
Page 110 of 213
decisions made by the Superbike Commission at
any time deemed necessary to ensure fair
competition.
2.6.4
Minimum weight
All machines
170kg (374lbs)
a. At any time during the event, the weight of the
whole motorcycle (including the tank and its
contents) must not be lower than the minimum
weight.
b. There is no tolerance on the minimum weight of the
motorcycle.
c. During the final technical inspection at the end of
the race, the selected motorcycles will be
weighed in the condition they finished the race,
and the established weight limit must be met in
this condition. Nothing may be added to the
motorcycle. This includes all fluids.
d. During the practice and qualifying sessions, riders
may be asked to submit their motorcycle to a
weight control. In all cases the rider must
comply with this request.
e. The use of ballast is allowed to stay over the
minimum weight limit and may be required due to
the handicap system. The use of ballast and
weight handicap must be declared to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director at the preliminary
checks.
2.6.5
Numbers and Number Plates
The background colors and figures (numbers) for
Superstock are red (pantone 186c) background with
white numbers:
The sizes for all the front numbers are:
Minimum height:
140 mm
Minimum width:
80 mm
Minimum stroke:
25 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
The sizes for all the side numbers are:
Minimum height:
120 mm
Minimum width:
70 mm
Minimum stroke:
20 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
The allocated number (& plate) for the rider must be
affixed on the motorcycle as follows:
a. Once on the front, either in the center of the
fairing or slightly off to one side. The number must
Page 111 of 213
be centered on the red background with no
advertising within 25mm in all directions.
b. Once, on each side of the motorcycle. The
preferred location for the numbers on each side
of the motorcycle is on the lower rear portion of the
main fairing near the bottom. The number must
be centered on the red background. Any change
to this position must be pre-approved a minimum of
2 weeks before the first race by the MotoAmerica
Technical Director.
c. The numbers must use the fonts as detailed in Art
2.14. Any numbers not using these fonts must have
the design of the numbers and the layout preapproved by the MotoAmerica Technical Director a
minimum of 2 weeks before the first race. All digits
must be of standard form.
d. Any outlines must be of a contrasting color and the
maximum width of the outline is 3mm. The
background color must be clearly visible around all
edges of the number (including outline). Reflective
or mirror type numbers are not permitted.
e. Numbers cannot overlap.
In case of a dispute concerning the legibility of
numbers, the decision of the Technical Director will
be final.
2.6.6
Fuel
Refer to Article: 2.9
2.6.7
Tires
a. The maximum number of tires, of any type,
available to each rider during the event will be
specified in Article: 2.3.7
b. A maximum of 11 tires per rider can be mounted at
any time.
c. For both Superbike/Superstock 1000 races only,
wet and intermediate tires will not need to be
marked with a tire sticker. They will not be
considered in the total number of tires available
for use; however normal allocation limits still apply.
d. Every tire used during the event must be marked
with an adhesive sticker with a number allocated
by the MotoAmerica Technical Director. The
sticker will be a different color front and rear.
e. The tire stickers will be delivered to the teams in
a sealed envelope, on the day before the first
practice after which the teams will be responsible
for their use.
Page 112 of 213
f. The stickers must be applied to the left sidewall of
the tire. Officials will check that all the motorcycles
in the pit lane are fitted with tires carrying the sticker.
g. The use of motorcycles without the official
stickers will be immediately reported to the Race
Direction whom will take appropriate action.
h. Any modification or treatment (cutting, grooving) is
forbidden.
i. After the third free practice session, the tire
supplier will allocate one (1) rear ‘qualifying tire’
to all riders that will participate in Superpole.
j. Qualifying tires can only be used during
Superpole.
k. If the qualifying tire is used during any session
(excluding Superpole), the rider will lose his
qualifying time and must start from the back of
the grid.
l. At the beginning of the event, the Official Supplier
may be requested by the MotoAmerica Technical
Director to deliver to him four (4) samples of each
type of tire to be used at the event.
m. The allocation of individual tires will be made on
a random basis, with no involvement of any
representative from the tire supplier, teams or
riders. Those tires will be individually identified and
may not be exchanged between riders, including
between team mates, and may not be
exchanged by the tire supplier after the allocation,
except with the permission of the Race Direction.
n. In exceptional cases, should the sticker be
damaged or applied in the wrong way, up to 2
extra stickers may be provided at the sole discretion
of the MotoAmerica Technical Director. However,
the damaged sticker must be returned to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director and/or the tire it
was applied to, must be absolutely intact.
2.6.8
Engine
2.6.8.1
Fuel injection system
Fuel injection systems refer to throttle bodies, fuel
injectors, variable length intake tract devices, fuel
pump and fuel pressure regulator.
a. The original homologated fuel injection system
must be used without any modification.
b. The fuel injectors must be stock and unaltered
from the original specification and manufacture.
c. Air Funnels must remain as originally produced
by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle.
Page 113 of 213
d. Butterfly valves cannot be changed or modified.
e. Variable intake tract devices cannot be added if
they are not present on the homologated
motorcycle and they must remain identical and
operate in the same way as the homologated
system. All the parts of the variable intake tract
device must remain exactly as homologated.
f. Air and air/fuel mixture can go to the
combustion chamber exclusively through the
throttle body butterflies.
g. Electronically controlled throttle valves, known as
‘ride-by-wire’, may be only used if the
homologated model is equipped with the same
system. Software may be modified but all the
safety systems and procedures designed by the
original manufacturer must be maintained.
2.6.8.2
Cylinder Head
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
b. The gaskets may be changed.
c. The valves, valve seats, guides, springs, tappets,
oil seals, shims, cotter valve, rocker arms, spring
base and spring retainers must be as originally
produced by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle.
Only
normal
maintenance
interventions as prescribed by the Manufacturer
in the service manual of the motorcycle are
authorized.
d. Only normal maintenance interventions as
prescribed by the manufacturer in the service
manual of the motorcycle are authorized.
e. Valve spring shims are not allowed.
2.6.8.3
Camshaft
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
b. At the technical checks: for direct cam drive
systems, the cam lobe lift is measured; for nondirect cam drive systems (i.e. with rocker arms),
the valve lift is measured.
2.6.8.4
Cam sprockets or gears
a. Cam Sprockets may be slotted to allow the
adjustment of cam timing.
b. Pressed on cam sprockets may be replaced with
an adjustable boss and cam sprocket.
c. Cam chain tensioner must remain as homologated.
Page 114 of 213
2.6.8.5
Cylinders
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.6.8.6
Pistons
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.6.8.7
Piston rings
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.6.8.8
Piston pins and clips
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.6.8.9
Connecting rods
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.6.8.10 Crankshaft
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
2.6.8.11 Crankcase / Gearbox housing
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
b. It is not allowed to add a pump used to create a
vacuum in the crankcase. If a vacuum pump is
installed on the homologated motorcycle, then it
may be used only as homologated.
2.6.8.11.1 Lateral covers and protection
a. Lateral (side) covers may be altered, modified or
replaced. If altered or modified, the cover must
have at least the same resistance to impact as
the original. If replaced, the cover must be made
in material of same or higher specific weight and
the total weight of the cover must not be less than
the original.
b. All lateral covers/engine cases containing oil and
which could be in contact with the ground during
a crash, must be either replaced by a ‘heavier’
engine cover or protected by a second cover made
from metal such as aluminum alloy, stainless steel,
steel or titanium, or an approved cover.
c. Any secondary covers must cover a minimum of
1/3 of the original cover. It must have no sharp
edges to damage the track surface. These covers
must be fixed properly and securely with a
minimum of three (3) case cover screws that
also mount the original covers/engine cases to
the crankcases.
Page 115 of 213
d. Plates or crash bars made from aluminum or
steel also are permitted in addition to these
covers. All of these devices must be designed
to be resistant against sudden shocks, abrasions
and crash damage.
e. FIM approved covers will be permitted without
regard of the material or dimensions.
f. These covers must be fixed properly and securely
with case cover screws that also mount the original
covers/engine cases to the crankcases.
g. Oil containing engine case must be secured
with steel bolts.
h. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
cover not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.6.8.12 Transmission / Gearbox
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed except shimming.
b. Quick-shift systems are allowed (including wire and
potentiometer).
c. Countershaft sprocket, rear wheel sprocket, chain
pitch and size may be changed.
d. The sprocket cover may be modified or eliminated.
e. Chain guard as long as it is not incorporated in
the rear fender may be removed.
2.6.8.13 Clutch
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
b. Only friction and drive discs may be changed,
but their number must remain as original.
c. Clutch springs may be changed.
2.6.8.14 Oil pumps and oil lines
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
b. Oil lines may be modified or replaced. Oil lines
containing positive pressure, if replaced, must be
of metal reinforced construction with swaged or
threaded connectors.
2.6.8.15 Radiator, cooling system and oil cooler
a. The only liquid engine coolants permitted is
water.
b. The original water radiator may be altered or
replaced but the appearance of the front, the
rear and the profile of the motorcycle must
not be changed.
Page 116 of 213
c. An additional water radiator may be fitted but the
appearance of the front, the rear and the profile
of the motorcycle must not be changed. Extra
mounting brackets to accommodate the additional
radiator are permitted.
d. Protective meshes may be added in front of the
oil and/or water radiator(s).
e. Oil coolers / heat exchangers must remain as
homologated.
f. The cooling system hoses and catch tanks may be
changed.
g. Radiator fan and wiring may be removed. Thermal
switches, water
temperature
sensor and
thermostat may be removed inside the cooling
system.
h. Radiator cap is free.
2.6.8.16 Air box
a. The air box must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed.
b. The air filter element may be modified or replaced
but must be mounted in the original position.
c. The air box drains must be sealed.
d. All motorcycles must have a closed breather
system. All oil breather lines must be connected
(may pass through an oil catch tank) and
discharge in the airbox.
e. No heat protection may be attached to the air box.
(i.e. Foil heat tape).
2.6.8.17 Fuel supply
a. Fuel pump and fuel pressure regulator must be the
originally fitted and homologated part with no
modification allowed.
b. The fuel pressure must be as homologated.
c. Fuel lines from the fuel tank to the delivery pipe
assembly (excluded) may be replaced and must be
located in such a way that they are protected from
crash damage.
d. Quick connectors or dry break connectors may be
used.
e. Fuel vent lines may be replaced.
f. Fuel filters may be added.
2.6.8.18 Exhaust system
a. Exhaust pipes and silencers may be modified or
changed. Catalytic converters must be removed.
Page 117 of 213
b. The number of the final exhaust silencer(s) must
remain as homologated. The silencer(s) must be
on the same side(s) of the homologated model.
c. For safety reasons, the exposed edges of the
exhausts pipe(s) outlet must be rounded to avoid
any sharp edges.
d. Wrapping of exhaust systems is not allowed
except in the area of the rider’s foot or an area
in contact with the fairing for protection from heat.
e. The noise limit for Superstock will be 115 dB/A
(with a 3 dB/A tolerance after the race only)
measured at 6000rpm (4 cylinder) and 5500rpm
(2, 3 cylinder). The test will be carried out
according to the details noted in Art 2.13.
2.6.9
Electrics and electronics
2.6.9.1
Ignition / Engine Control System (ECU)
a. The engine control system (ECU) must be an ECU
(Kit or OEM) applicable to the specific homologated
model. The ECU may have its software changed,
but the ECU may not be physically modified.
b. The system may have FIM/DWO/MotoAmerica
approved external ignition and/or injection module/s
added.
c. The total combined retail price (software and tuning
tools included) on sale to the general public cannot
be higher than €3000 (tax excluded) or €3750 if it is
a kit ECU than includes data logging facility.
d. Central unit (ECU) may be relocated.
e. Corner by corner or distance/position based
adjustments are not allowed.
f. Optional equipment sold by the motorcycle
Manufacturer for the homologated model is
considered not homologated with the bike and
must follow the requirements for approved
electronics/data loggers.
g. During an event the Technical Director has the
right to ask a team to substitute their ECU or
external module with the sample received from the
Manufacturer. The change has to be done before
Sunday warm up.
h. No extra sensors may be added for control
strategies except shift rod sensor, wheel speed
sensors and lambda sensors. Wheel speed sensors
must be included in the Kit ECU and Harness
package if required.
i. Other additional electronic hardware equipment
not on the original homologated motorcycle
Page 118 of 213
cannot be added with the exceptions noted
below.
j. The characteristics of approved data logging
systems must be the following:
1. Maximum retail price of the unit (hardware +
software, excluding sensors and wiring
harness) cannot exceed €3.000 Euro (VAT
excluded) if it is a standalone unit.
2. Maximum retail price of the unit if incorporated
into the ECU (hardware and software, excluding
sensors and wiring harness) is €3750.
3. The Data Logger unit must be available for sale
to the public and
on
the
list
of
FIM/DWO/MotoAmerica
‘Superbike
EVO’
approved data loggers.
4. A maximum of 7 simultaneous working sensors
(connected to the additional data logger) may
be added to the original sensors on the
motorcycle. The sensors must be from the
following list:
 Lambda (must be supplied in the kit if used for
strategy)
 Fork position
 Shock position
 Front brake pressure
 Rear brake pressure
 Fuel pressure (not temperature)
 Oil pressure
 Oil temperature
 Transponder / Lap time signal
 GPS Unit (Lap timing and track position)
5. The sensors must be simple-function. No
inertial platforms are allowed (if an inertial
platform is not installed originally on the
homologated motorcycle).
6. CAN (or other data) communication from the
ECU to an approved data logger (logger can
receive data only, no data transmission is
allowed) is allowed without any limitation in
CAN channel logger number.
k. The
maximum
total
price
of
other
active/control/calculation units such as lambda
driver modules, quick shifter, and analogue to
CAN and traction control units is €750. These
devices
must
be
approved
by
FIM/DWO/MotoAmerica.
l. Telemetry is not allowed.
Page 119 of 213
m. No remote or wireless connection to the bike for
any data exchange or setting is allowed whilst the
engine is running or the bike is moving.
n. For the Superstock Kit to be approved, samples
of the ECU kits, kit harnesses and external
modules with their tuning tools must be sent by
the Manufacturers to the MotoAmerica Technical
Director, with technical data and selling price.
o. For the ignition and or injection module, quick shifter
or standalone data logger to be approved, samples
must be sent by the manufacturer of the device to
the MotoAmerica Technical Director with technical
data and selling price.
p. The original speedometer and tachometer may be
altered or replaced (see also Art. 2.6.11).
q. Spark plugs may be replaced.
r. Battery is free.
2.6.9.2
Wiring Harness
a. The Wiring Harness is free.
b. Each team must provide a download connection
lead to the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
2.6.9.3
Generator, alternator, electric starter
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
b. The stator must be fitted in its original position
and without offsetting.
c. The electric starter must operate normally and
always be able to start the engine during the event.
d. During parc fermé the starter must crank the
engine at a suitable speed for starting for a
minimum of 2 seconds without the use of a
boost battery. No boost battery may be
connected to the machine after the end of the
session.
2.6.10
Main frame and spare motorcycle
a. During the entire duration of the event, each rider
may only use one (1) complete motorcycle, as
presented for Technical Control, with the frame
clearly identified with a seal. In case the frame
needs to be replaced, the rider or the team must
request the use of a spare frame to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director.
b. One (1) Spare complete motorcycle is allowed per
rider.
c. A team may opt to have one (1) spare machine
shared by two or more riders.
Page 120 of 213
For a full explanation of procedures see article
2.4.10.
2.6.10.1 Frame body and rear sub frame
a. The frame must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer for the homologated machine.
b. The main frame may only be altered by the addition
of gussets or tubes. No gussets or tubes may be
removed.
c. Holes may be drilled on the frame only to fix
approved components (i.e. fairing brackets,
steering damper mount, sensors).
d. The homologated dimensions and position of
bearing seats in the steering head column, and the
engine, swing arm, rear shock, and suspension
linkage mounting points must remain as original.
e. Steering angle changes are permitted by fitting
offsetting inserts onto the bearing seats of the
original steering head, but no part of the insert
must protrude axially more than 3 mm from the
original steering head.
f. If the homologated machine has exchangeable
bearing inserts/bushes: The bushings/inserts
are free to make a +/- 6mm adjustment fore and
aft in the plane of the original bearing seat. The
homologated position is considered as the
position in which the production motorcycle is
supplied.
g. The swing arm pivot axis may be moved a
maximum of 5 mm radially (excluding
tolerances) measured from the homologated
axis. If the homologated machine does not allow
pivot adjustment then the swing arm pivot
position may be adjusted by the use of offset
inserts, the frame cannot be modified to
accommodate the inserts.
h. All motorcycles must display a unique vehicle
identification number on the main frame body
(chassis number).
i. No polishing or surface refinishing is allowed but the
paint scheme is not restricted.
j. Front and rear sub frame may be changed,
altered or removed. The use of composites are
allowed.
2.6.10.2 Suspension - General
a. Participants in the Superstock class must only use
the approved and listed suspension units for that
season. The price limits are:
1. Fork: For the fork kit, including all parts
Page 121 of 213
such as but not limited to cartridge, springs
(1 set), adjusters, fork caps, blanking inserts,
seals, bushes but excepting oil and fitting
the price limit is €2200 excluding tax.
2. Shock Absorber/RCU: For the complete
shock absorber / RCU including but not
limited to spring (1), pre-load adjuster and
length/ride height adjuster the price limit is
€2000 excluding tax.
b. The approved products from the suspension
manufacturers must be available to all participants
at least one month before the first round of the
MotoAmerica Superbike season, and remain
available all season. The products must be
available within 6 weeks of a confirmed order.
c. Setting parts and tuning parts must be provided by
the suspension manufacturers to all customers/
teams/ participants using the manufacturer’s
products. These parts can be used by all
participants during the season. These parts shall
be available for immediate delivery to all
teams/customers.
d. Teams may not modify any part of the forks or
shock absorber; all setting parts must be supplied
by the Suspension manufacturer and available to
all teams/riders.
e. The suspension manufacturers are allowed to offer
service contracts when the team is using the
approved and listed suspension products. The
suspension manufacturers cannot demand a
service contract for a customer or participant in
order to obtain a suspension product.
f. Electronic Suspension:
1. No aftermarket or prototype electronicallycontrolled suspensions maybe used.
Electronically-controlled suspension may
only be used if already present on the
production model of the homologated
motorcycle.
2. The electronically-controlled valves must
remain as homologated. The shims, spacers
and fork/shock springs not connected with
these valves can be changed.
3. The ECU for the electronic suspension must
remain as homologated and cannot receive
any motorcycle track position or sector
information; the suspension cannot be
adjusted relative to track position.
4. The electronic interface between the rider
and the suspension must remain as on the
homologated motorcycle. It is allowed to
Page 122 of 213
remove or disable this rider interface.
5. The original suspension system must work
safely in the event of an electronic failure.
6. Electro-magnetic fluid systems which
change the viscosity of the suspension
fluid(s) during operation are not permitted.
g. Electronic controlled steering damper cannot
be used if not installed in the homologated
model for road use. However, it must be
completely standard (any mechanical or
electronic part must remain as homologated).
2.6.10.3 Front Forks
a. Forks must remain as originally produced by the
manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
b. Original internal parts of the homologated forks may
be modified or changed. After market damper kits or
valves may be installed.
c. The original surface finish of the fork tubes
(stanchions, fork pipes) may be changed. Additional
surface treatments are allowed.
d. Fork caps and external damping adjusters may be
modified or replaced.
e. The upper and lower fork clamps (triple clamp,
fork bridges) may be modified or replaced.
f. A fork brace may be installed. Fork bottoms may be
modified for speed and suspension sensors. Axle
hole may not be increased in bore but may have a
sleeve for captive axle’s nut.
g. Fender brackets may be modified to maintain stock
tire to fender clearance when using race tires or to
provide clearance for caliper mounting brackets.
h. A steering damper may be added or replaced with
an after-market damper.
i. The steering damper cannot act as a steering lock
limiting device.
j. Electronic forks may have their complete internal
parts (including all electronic control) replaced with
a conventional damping system and it will be
considered as a mechanical fork.
2.6.10.4 Rear front (Swing arm)
a. Swing arm must remain as originally produced
by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle with the following changes:
1. Rear wheel stand mounts may be added to
the swing arm by welding or by bolts.
Brackets must have rounded edges (with
Page 123 of 213
a large radius). Mounting bolts must be
recessed.
2. Gussets and bracing may be added. A
provision for shock absorber and spring
clearances is allowed.
3. Link and link arm pick up points must remain
as homologated.
4. Axle components associated with locating
the rear axle position (not permanently
attached to the swing arm) may be
modified or replaced.
5. The range of axle adjustment may be
modified by machining existing components
or replacing only the area the axle
assemblies’ travel. i.e. welding in billet
blocks to provide optional wheelbase
range. Any modifications to the swing arm
assembly must be pre-approved by the
MotoAmerica Technical Director.
b. A chain guard must be fitted in such a way as to
reduce the possibility that any part of the riders’
body may become trapped between the lower
chain run and the rear wheel sprocket.
2.6.10.5 Rear suspension
a. Rear suspension unit may be changed but a similar
system must be used (i.e. dual or mono).
b. The rear suspension linkage may be modified or
replaced.
c. The original fixing points on the frame (if any) must
be used to mount the shock absorber, linkage and
rod assembly fulcrum (pivot points).
d. Removable top shock mounts may be replaced. If
replaced they must retain their homologated
geometry.
2.6.10.6 Wheels
a. Wheels must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
b. Wheels of different versions of the same model
and same year bikes (i.e. R1, R1M, R1S) can be
used instead of the original wheels but they must
appear in the MotoAmerica Superstock 1000
wheel approval list.
c. A non-slip coating / treatment may be applied to the
bead area of the rim.
d. If the original design includes a cushion drive for
the rear wheel, it must remain as originally
produced for the homologated motorcycle.
Page 124 of 213
e. Bearings, seals, spacers and axles may be
altered or replaced from those fitted to the
homologated motorcycle. The use of titanium
and light alloys is forbidden for wheel spindles
(axles).
f. Wheel balance weights may be discarded, changed
or added.
g. Any inflation valves may be used.
2.6.10.7 Brakes
a. Front brake master cylinder may be altered or
replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle.
b. Front brake calipers may be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
c. Rear brake master cylinder may be altered or
replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle.
d. Rear brake calipers may be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
e. Brake pads or shoes may be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
f. Brake hoses and brake couplings may be altered
or replaced from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle. The split of the front brake lines for
both front brake calipers must be made above the
lower fork bridge (lower triple clamp).
g. Brake discs may be altered or replaced from
those fitted to the homologated motorcycle. Only
ferrous materials are allowed for brake discs.
The use of exotic alloy materials for brake calipers
(i.e. aluminum-beryllium, etc.) is not allowed.
h. Brake discs may be altered or replaced from
those fitted to the homologated motorcycle.
Only steel (max. carbon content 2.1 wt. %) is
allowed for brake discs. Alloys containing
beryllium are not allowed to be used for brake
calipers.
i. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) may be used
only if installed in the homologated model for
road use. However, it must be completely
standard (any mechanical or electronic part must
remain as homologated, brake discs and master
cylinder levers excluded), and only the software of
the ABS may be modified.
j. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) can be
disconnected and its ECU can be dismantled. The
ABS rotor wheel can be deleted, modified or
replaced.
Page 125 of 213
k. Motorcycles must be equipped with brake lever
protection, intended to protect the handlebar
brake lever from being accidentally activated in
case of collision with another motorcycle.
Composite guards are not permitted. FIM
approved guards will be permitted without regard
to the material.
l. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
guard not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.6.10.8 Handlebars and hand controls
a. Handlebars may be replaced.
b. Handlebars and hand controls may be relocated.
c. Throttle controls must be self-closing when not held
by the hand.
d. Throttle assembly and associated cables may be
modified or replaced but the connection to the
throttle body and to the throttle controls must
remain as on the homologated motorcycle.
e. Clutch and brake lever may be replaced with an
after-market model. An adjuster to the brake lever
is allowed.
f. Switches may be changed but the electric starter
switch and engine stop switch must be located on
the handlebars.
g. Motorcycles must be equipped with a functional
ignition kill switch or button mounted on the
right hand handlebar (within reach of the hand
while on the hand grips) that is capable of stopping
a running engine. The button or switch must be
RED.
2.6.10.9 Foot rest / Foot controls
a. Foot rests, hangers/brackets and hardware may
be
replaced
and
relocated
but
the
hangers/brackets must be mounted to their
original frame mounting points.
b. Foot controls; gear shift and rear brake must
remain operated manually by foot.
c. Foot rests may be rigidly mounted or a folding
type which must incorporate a device to return
them to the normal position.
d. The end of the foot rest must have at least
an 8 mm solid spherical radius.
e. Non folding footrests must have an end (plug)
which is permanently fixed, made of aluminum,
plastic Teflon® or an equivalent type material
(minimum radius 8mm). The plug surface must be
designed to reach the widest possible area.
Page 126 of 213
f. The MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right
to refuse any plug not satisfying this safety aim.
2.6.10.10 Fuel tank
a. The fuel tank must conform in principle to the
homologated appearance and location of the
original tank; however, its actual shape can be
slightly changed to suit the rider’s preference
and increased fuel volume. The tank may also
be modified below the upper frame line and
under the seat.
b. The tank may be replaced by a fuel cell and a
structural cover.
c. The material of construction of the fuel tank may
be altered from the one of the tank fitted to the
homologated motorcycle.
d. All fuel tanks must be filled with fire retardant
material (i.e. fuel cell foam), or be fitted with a
fuel cell bladder.
e. Fuel tanks made of composite materials (carbon
fiber, aramid fiber, glass fiber, etc.) must have
passed the FIM Standards for fuel tanks or be
lined with a fuel cell bladder.
f. Tanks made of composite material must bear
the label certifying conformity with FIM Fuel
Tank Test Standards. Fuel tanks without a fuel
cell bladder must bear a label certifying
conformity with FIM Fuel Tank Test Standards.
g. Such labels must include the fuel tank
manufacturer’s name, date of tank manufacture,
and name of testing laboratory.
h. Each manufacturer is requested to inform the
FIM/CCR Secretariat of its fuel tank model(s)
which have passed the FIM test standards,
together with a copy of the fuel tank label. Full
details of the FIM Fuel Tank Test Standards and
Procedures are available from the FIM (See ‘Fuel
Tank Test Standards’ below).
i. Fuel cell bladders must conform to or exceed
the specification FIM/FCB-2005. Full details of
this standard are available from the FIM.
j. The fuel tank must be fixed to the frame from the
front and the rear with a crash-proof assembly
system. Bayonet style couplings cannot be
used, nor may the tank be fixed to any parts of
the streamlining (fairing) or any plastic part. The
MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right to
refuse a motorcycle if he is of the opinion that
the fuel tank fixation is not safe.
k. The original tank may be modified to achieve the
Page 127 of 213
maximum capacity of 24 liters, provided the
original profile is as homologated.
l. A cross over line between each side of the tank
is allowed (maximum inside diameter 10 mm).
m. Fuel tanks with tank breather pipes must be
fitted with non-return valves which discharge
into a catch tank with a minimum volume of 250
cc made of a suitable material.
n. Fuel tank filler caps may be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated
motorcycle, and when closed, must be leak
proof. Additionally, they must be secured to
prevent accidental opening at any time.
o. The same size fuel tank used in practice must
be used during the entire event.
2.6.10.10.1 Fuel tank homologation
a. Any fuel tanks, made of non-ferrous materials
(with the exception of aluminum) must be tested
according to the test procedure prescribed by
the FIM.
b. Each manufacturer is responsible for testing its
own fuel tank model(s) and will certify that the
fuel tank exceeds the FIM test standard, if it has
passed the FIM test procedure for fuel tanks.
c. Each manufacturer must affix a quality and test
label on each fuel tank type that is produced
for competition use. This quality and test label
will be the recognition of a fuel tank model
which has passed the FIM test procedure.
d. All fuel tanks that are made to the same design,
dimensions, number of fiber layers, grade of
fiber, percentage of resin, etc., must be
identified with the same quality and test label.
e. The quality and test label will include the
following information on each label affixed to
each fuel tank: name of the fuel tank manufacturer,
date of fabrication, code or part number, name of
testing laboratory, fuel capacity.
f. Each manufacturer is requested to inform the
FIM/CCR Secretariat of its fuel tank model(s)
which have passed the FIM test procedure, with a
copy of the quality and test label, according to
point e.
g. Only fuel tanks that have passed the FIM test
procedure will be accepted.
2.6.10.11 Fairing / Bodywork
a. Fairing and bodywork may be replaced with exact
cosmetic duplicates of the original parts, but must
Page 128 of 213
appear to be as originally produced by the
manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle, with
slight differences due to the racing use (different
pieces mix, fixing points, fairing bottom, etc.). The
material may be changed. The use of carbon fiber
or carbon composite materials is not allowed.
Specific reinforcements in Kevlar® or carbon are
allowed locally around holes and stressed areas.
Headlights must be included even when
considered external.
b. Overall size and dimensions must be the same as
the original part, with a tolerance of +-10mm,
respecting the design and features of the
homologated fairing as far as possible. The
overall width of the frontal area may be +10mm
maximum. The decision of the Technical
Director is final.
c. Wind screen may be replaced with an aftermarket
product. The height of the windscreen is free,
within a tolerance of +/- 15 mm referred to the
vertical distance from/to the upper fork bridge. The
screen must conform to the same profile from
the front as the original – no double bubble or
wide types. From a top view the length of the
windscreen may be shortened by 25mm to allow
clearance for the rider. The edge of the screen
must have no sharp edges.
d. Motorcycles that are not originally equipped with
streamlining are not allowed to add streamlining
in any form, with the exception of a lower fairing
device, as described in point (h). This device cannot
exceed above a line drawn horizontally from
wheel axle to wheel axle and must follow the
specifications described at point (h and i).
e. The
original
combination
instrument/fairing
brackets may be replaced, but the use of titanium
and carbon (or similar composite materials) is
forbidden. All other fairing brackets may be altered
or replaced.
f. The ram-air intake must maintain the originally
homologated shape and dimensions.
g. The original air ducts running between the fairing
and the air box may be altered or replaced.
Carbon fiber composites and other exotic
materials are forbidden. Particle grills or “wiremeshes” originally installed in the openings for
the air ducts may be removed.
h. The lower fairing must to be constructed to hold,
in case of an engine breakdown minimum 6
liters. The lower edge of all the openings in the
fairing must be positioned at least 70 mm above the
bottom of the fairing.
Page 129 of 213
i. There may be no exit air vents in the front half of
the lower fairing below a line 40mm below line
between the wheel axles of the machine. The
MotoAmerica Technical Director may give
permission for the lower fairing to have
additional vents added if vents have been filled
to meet the these and the oil containment
requirements. Any added vents will not allow the
exit of air in the front half of the fairing lower if
they are behind a water or oil radiator.
j. Exceptions may be made to 2.6.10.11.i with the
sole agreement of the MotoAmerica Technical
Director if a manufacturer produced and FIM
approved close fitting, oil containing engine
shroud is fitted in addition to the belly pan. In
this case OEM shaped air vents will be allowed
in the front lower half of the fairing.
k. Any vents in the fairing lower must have their
inner surface finish in-line with their outer
surface or overlap to reduce the risk of liquid
spraying from the machine.
l. The upper edge of the rear transverse wall of the
lower fairing must be at least 70 mm above the
bottom. The angle between this wall and the floor
must be ≤ 90°.
m. Original openings for cooling in the lateral
fairing/bodywork sections may be partially closed
only to accommodate sponsors' logos / lettering.
Such modification shall be made using wire mesh
or perforated plate. The material is free but the
distance between all opening centers, circle
centers and their diameters must be constant.
Holes or perforations must have an open area ratio
> 60%.
n. Motorcycles may be equipped with a radiator
shroud (inner ducts) to improve the air stream
towards the radiator but the appearance of the
front, the rear and the profile of the motorcycle
must not be changed.
o. The lower fairing must incorporate a single opening
of Ø 25 mm diameter in the front lower area. This
hole must remain sealed in dry conditions and must
be only opened in wet race conditions as
declared by the Race Director.
p. Front mudguards may be replaced with a cosmetic
duplicate of the original parts and may be spaced
upward for increased tire clearance.
q. Rear mudguard fixed on the swing arm may
be modified, changed or removed.
r. Material of construction of the front mudguard
and rear mudguard is free.
Page 130 of 213
2.6.10.12 Seat
a. Seat, seat base and associated bodywork may be
replaced. The appearance from front, rear and
profile must conform to the homologated shape.
b. The top portion of the rear bodywork around the
seat may be modified to a solo seat.
c. The homologated seat locking system (with plates,
pins, rubber pads etc.) may be removed.
d. Same material as fairing must be used. (article
2.6.10.11.a)
e. All exposed edges must be rounded.
2.6.10.13 Rear Safety Light
All motorcycles must have a functioning red light
mounted at the rear of the machine; this light must
be switched on any time the motorcycle is on the
track or being ridden in the pit-lane and the session is
declared wet. All lights must comply with the following:
a. Lighting direction must be parallel to the machine
center line (motorcycle running direction), and be
clearly visible from the rear at least 15 degrees to
both left and right sides of the machine center line.
b. The rear light must be mounted near the end of
the seat/rear bodywork and approximately on the
machine center line, in a position approved by the
Technical Director. In case of dispute over the
mounting position or visibility, the decision of the
Technical Director will be final.
c. Power
output/luminosity
equivalent
to
approximately: 10 – 15 (incandescent), 0.6 – 1.8 W
(LED).
d. The output must be continuous - no flashing
safety light whilst on track, flashing is allowed in
the pit lane when pit limiter is active.
e. Safety light power supply may be separated from
the motorcycle.
f. The MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right to
refuse any light system not satisfying this safety
purpose.
2.6.10.14 Fasteners
a. Standard fasteners may be replaced with
fasteners of any material and design but titanium
fasteners cannot be used. The strength and
design must be equal to or exceed the strength of
the standard fastener.
Page 131 of 213
b. Fasteners may be drilled for safety wire, but
intentional weight-reduction modifications are not
allowed.
c. Thread repairs may be made using inserts of
different material such as Helicoils® and
Timeserts®.
d. Fairing / bodywork fasteners may be replaced
with the quick disconnect type.
e. Aluminum fasteners may only be used in nonstructural locations.
2.6.11
The following items MAY be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle
a. Any type of lubrication, brake or suspension fluid
may be used.
b. Gaskets and gasket materials.
c. Instruments, instrument bracket(s) and associated
cables.
d. Painted external surface finishes and decals.
e. Material for brackets connecting non original parts
(fairing, exhaust, instruments, etc.) to the frame (or
engine) cannot be made from titanium or fiber
reinforced composites excepting the exhaust
silencer hanger that may be in carbon.
f. Protective covers for the frame, chain, footrests,
etc. may be made in other materials like fiber
composite material if these parts do not replace
original parts mounted on the homologated model.
2.6.12
The following items MAY BE Removed
a. Emission control items (anti-pollution) in or around
the air box and engine (O2 sensors, air injection
devices).
b. Tachometer.
c. Speedometer.
d. Bolt-on accessories on a rear sub frame.
2.6.13
The following items MUST BE Removed
a. Headlamp, rear lamp and turn signal indicators
(when not incorporated in the fairing). Openings
must be covered by suitable materials.
b. Rear-view mirrors.
c. Horn.
d. License plate bracket.
e. Toolkit.
f. Helmet hooks and luggage carrier hooks.
Page 132 of 213
g. Passenger foot rests.
h. Passenger grab rails.
i. Safety bars, center and side stands must be
removed (fixed brackets must remain).
2.6.14
The following items MUST BE altered
a. All drain plugs must be wired. External oil filter(s)
screws and bolts that enter an oil cavity must be
safety wired (i.e. on crankcases).
b. Where breather or overflow pipes are fitted they
must discharge via existing outlets. The original
closed system must be retained: no direct
atmospheric emission is permitted.
c. Motorcycles must be equipped with a red light on
the instrument panel that will illuminate in the event
of oil pressure drop.
Page 133 of 213
SUPERSTOCK 600 TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.7.7
2.7.8
2.7.9
2.7.10
2.7.11
2.7.12
2.7.13
2.7.14
SSTK 600 TECH REGULATIONS
MOTORCYCLE SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE CONFIGURATIONS
BALANCING CONCEPTS
MINIMUM WEIGHT
NUMBERS & NUMBER PLATES
FUEL
TIRES
ENGINE
ELECTRICS & ELECTRONICS
MAIN FRAME
ITEMS MAY BE ALTERED/ REPLACED
ITEMS THAT MAY BE REMOVED
ITEMS THAT MUST BE REMOVED
ITEMS THAT MUST BE ALTERED
Page 134 of 213
134
134
134
134
135
135
136
136
137
142
143
153
154
154
154
2.7
SUPERSTOCK 600 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following rules are intended to permit limited
changes to the homologated motorcycle in the interest
of safety and improved competition between various
motorcycle concepts.
EVERYTHING THAT IS NOT AUTHORIZED AND
PRESCRIBED IN THIS RULE IS STRICTLY
FORBIDDEN
If a change to a part or system is not specifically
allowed in any of the following articles, then it is
forbidden
Superstock motorcycles require an FIM homologation
(see Art. 2.15). All motorcycles must comply in every
respect with all requirements for road racing as
specified in these Technical Regulations, unless they
are already equipped as such on the homologated
model.
For 2017: 2013-2017 Kawasaki ZX-6R (636) is
accepted as homologated for MotoAmerica
competition.
The appearance from the front, rear and the profile of
Superstock motorcycles must (except when otherwise
stated) conform to the homologated shape (as
originally produced by the manufacturer). The
appearance of the exhaust system is excluded from
this rule.
2.7.1
Motorcycle specifications
All parts and systems not specifically mentioned in the
following articles must remain as originally produced
by the manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
2.7.2
Engine configurations and displacement capacities
The following engine configurations comprise the
Superstock class:
Over 401cc up to 600cc
Over 401cc up to 675cc
4 stroke
4 stroke
4 cylinders
3 cylinders
The displacement capacity bore and stroke must
remain at the homologated size. Modifying the bore
and stroke to reach class limits is not allowed.
2.7.3
Balancing various motorcycle concepts
In order to equalize the performance of motorcycles
used in the Superstock 600 Championship, A system
of performance enhancements or restrictions can be
developed. (Such as minimum weight, air restrictor or
REV Limit may be applied according to their
respective racing performances.) The decision to
apply a balancing system to a motorcycle will be
taken by the MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau based
Page 135 of 213
on decisions made by the Superbike Commission
at any time deemed necessary to ensure fair
competition.
2.7.4
Minimum weight
The minimum weight will be:
Over 401cc up to 600cc
4 cylinder 164kg (360.8lb)
Over 401cc upto750cc
3 cylinder 164kg (360.8lb)
For 2017: 2013-2017 Kawasaki ZX-6R (636)
minimum weight- 166 kg (365.2 lbs)
At any time of the event, the weight of the whole
motorcycle (including the tank and its contents) must
not be lower than the minimum weight.
There is no tolerance on the minimum weight of the
motorcycle.
During the final technical inspection at the end of the
race, the selected motorcycles will be weighed in
the condition they finished the race, and the
established weight limit must be met in this condition.
Nothing may be added to the motorcycle. This
includes all fluids.
During the practice and qualifying sessions, riders
may be asked to submit their motorcycle to a weight
control. In all cases the rider must comply with
this request.
The use of ballast is allowed to stay over the
minimum weight limit and may be required due to
the handicap system. The use of ballast and weight
handicap must be declared to the MotoAmerica
Technical Director at the preliminary checks.
2.7.5
Numbers and Number Plates
The background colors and figures (numbers) for
Superstock 600 are red (pantone 186c) background
with yellow (pantone yellow) numbers:
The sizes for all the front numbers are:
Minimum height:
140 mm
Minimum width:
80 mm
Minimum stroke:
25 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
The sizes for all the side numbers are:
Minimum height:
120 mm
Minimum width:
70 mm
Minimum stroke:
20 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
Page 136 of 213
The allocated number (& plate) for the rider must be
affixed on the motorcycle as follows:
a. Once on the front, either in the center of the fairing
or slightly off to one side. The number must be
centered on the red background with no advertising
within 25mm in all directions.
b. Once, on each side of the motorcycle. The
preferred location for the numbers on each side
of the motorcycle is on the lower rear portion of the
main fairing near the bottom. The number must
be centered on the red background. Any change
to this position must be pre-approved a minimum of
2 weeks before the first race by the MotoAmerica
Technical Director.
c. The numbers must use the fonts as detailed in Art
2.14. Any numbers not using these fonts must have
the design of the numbers and the layout preapproved by the MotoAmerica Technical Director a
minimum of 2 weeks before the first race. All digits
must be of standard form.
d. Any outlines must be of a contrasting color and the
maximum width of the outline is 3mm. The
background color must be clearly visible around all
edges of the number (including outline). Reflective
or mirror type numbers are not permitted.
e. Numbers cannot overlap.
In case of a dispute concerning the legibility
of numbers, the decision of the MotoAmerica
Technical Director will be final.
2.7.6
Fuel
Refer to Article: 2.9
2.7.7
Tires
a. Tires must be a fully molded type carrying all size
and sidewall markings of the tires for commercial
sale to the public. The depth of the tire treads
must be at least 2.5 mm over the entire tire
pattern width at pre-race control. The tires must
have a positive and negative tread of 96% positive
and minimum 4% negative (land and sea ratio).
The maximum distance from the external edge of
the tire to 50% of the tread elements is 35 mm.
b. The maximum number of tires, of any type,
available to each rider during the event will be
specified in Article 2.3.7.
c. For the Superstock 600 race only, wet and
intermediate tires will not need to be marked with
a tire sticker. They will not be considered in the
total number of tires available for use, however
normal allocation limits still apply.
Page 137 of 213
d. Every tire used during the event must be marked
with an adhesive sticker with a number allocated
by the MotoAmerica Technical Director. The
sticker will be a different color front and rear.
e. The tire stickers will be delivered to the teams in
a sealed envelope, on the day before the first
practice after which the teams will be responsible
for their use.
f. Officials will check that all the motorcycles in the
pit lane are fitted with tires carrying the sticker.
g. The use of motorcycles without the official
stickers will be immediately reported to the Race
Direction whom will take appropriate action.
h. Tire stickers must be mounted to the left sidewall.
i. Any modification or treatment (cutting, grooving) is
forbidden.
j. At the beginning of the event, the Official Supplier
may be requested by the MotoAmerica Technical
Director to deliver to him four (4) samples of each
type of tire to be used at the event.
k. The allocation of individual tires will be made on a
random basis, with no involvement of any
representative from the tire supplier, teams or
riders. Those tires will be individually identified and
may not be exchanged between riders, including
between team mates, and may not be
exchanged by the tire supplier after the allocation,
except with the permission of the Race Direction.
l. In exceptional cases, should the sticker be
damaged or applied in the wrong way, up to 2
extra stickers may be provided at the sole discretion
of the MotoAmerica Technical Director. However,
the damaged sticker must be returned to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director and/or the tire it
was applied to, must be absolutely intact.
2.7.8
Engine
2.7.8.1
Fuel injection system
Fuel injection systems refer to throttle bodies, fuel
injectors, variable length intake tract devices, fuel
pump and fuel pressure regulator.
a. The original homologated fuel injection system
must be used without any modification.
b. The fuel injectors must be stock and unaltered
from the original specification and manufacture.
c. Bell mouths must remain as originally produced
by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle.
Page 138 of 213
d. Butterfly valves cannot be changed or modified.
e. Variable intake tract devices cannot be added if
they are not present on the homologated
motorcycle and they must remain identical and
operate in the same way as the homologated
system. All parts of the variable intake tract device
must remain exactly as homologated.
f. Air and air/fuel mixture can go to the
combustion chamber exclusively through the
throttle body butterflies.
g. Electronically controlled throttle valves, known as
‘ride-by-wire’, may only be used if the
homologated model is equipped with the same
system. Software may be modified but all safety
systems and procedures designed by the original
manufacturer must be maintained.
2.7.8.2
Cylinder Head
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
b. No material may be added or removed from
the cylinder head.
c. The gaskets may be changed.
d. The valves, valve seats, guides, springs, tappets,
oil seals, shims, cotter valve, spring base and
spring retainers must be as originally produced by
the
manufacturer
for
the
homologated
motorcycle.
Only
normal
maintenance
interventions as prescribed by the Manufacturer in
the service manual of the motorcycle are
authorized.
e. Valve spring shims are not allowed.
2.7.8.3
Camshaft
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
b. At the technical checks: for direct cam drive
systems, the cam lobe lift is measured; for nondirect cam drive systems (i.e. with rocker arms),
the valve lift is measured.
2.7.8.4
Cam sprockets or gears
a. Cam Sprockets may be slotted to allow the
adjustment of cam timing.
b. Pressed on cam sprockets may be replaced with
an adjustable boss and cam sprocket.
c. The cam chain must remain as homologated.
d. Cam chain tensioner must remain as homologated.
Page 139 of 213
2.7.8.5
Cylinders
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.7.8.6
Pistons
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.7.8.7
Piston rings
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.7.8.8
Piston pins and clips
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.7.8.9
Connecting rods
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.7.8.10 Crankshaft
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.7.8.11 Crankcase / Gearbox housing
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated
part with no modification (including painting,
polishing and lightening).
b. It is not allowed to add a pump used to create a
vacuum in the crankcase. If a vacuum pump is
installed on the homologated motorcycle then it
may be used only as homologated.
2.7.8.11.1 Lateral covers and protection
a. Lateral (side) covers may be altered, modified or
replaced. If altered or modified, the cover must
have at least the same resistance to impact as
the original. If replaced, the cover must be made
in material of same or higher specific weight and
the total weight of the cover must not be less than
the original.
b. All lateral covers/engine cases containing oil and
which could be in contact with the ground during
a crash, must be protected by a second cover
made from metal such as aluminum alloy,
stainless steel, steel or titanium, composite
covers are not permitted.
c. The secondary covers must cover a minimum of
1/3 of the original cover. It must have no sharp
edges to damage the track surface. The Technical
Directors decision on suitability is final.
Page 140 of 213
d. Plates or crash bars made from aluminum or
steel also are permitted in addition to these
covers. All of these devices must be designed
to be resistant against sudden shocks, abrasions
and crash damage.
e. FIM approved covers will be permitted without
regard of the material or dimensions.
f. These covers must be fixed properly and securely
with a minimum of three (3) case cover screws
that also mount the original covers/engine
cases to the crankcases.
g. Oil containing engine covers must be secured
with steel bolts.
h. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
cover not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.7.8.12 Transmission / Gearbox
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated
part with no modification allowed.
b. Quick-shift systems are allowed (including wire and
potentiometer).
c. Countershaft sprocket, rear wheel sprocket, chain
pitch and size may be changed.
d. The sprocket cover may be modified or eliminated.
e. Chain guard as long as it is not incorporated in
the rear fender may be removed.
2.7.8.13 Clutch
a. The original clutch assembly may be modified
or replaced by an aftermarket clutch, also
including back torque limiting capabilities (slipper
type).
b. Clutch system (wet or dry type) and the method of
operation (by cable or hydraulic) must remain as
homologated.
c. Friction and drive discs may be changed.
d. Clutch springs may be changed.
e. The clutch basket (outer) must be the originally
fitted and homologated part but may be
reinforced.
f. No power source (i.e. hydraulic or electric) can be
used for gear selection, if not installed in the
homologated model for road use. Human power
is excluded from the ban.
2.7.8.14 Oil pumps and oil lines
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated
part with no modification.
Page 141 of 213
b. Oil lines may be modified or replaced. Oil lines
containing positive pressure, if replaced, must be
of metal reinforced construction with swaged or
threaded connectors.
2.7.8.15 Radiator / Oil cooler
a. The only liquid engine coolants permitted is
water.
b. Protective meshes may be added in front of the
oil and/or water radiator(s).
c. The cooling system hoses and catch tanks may be
changed.
d. Radiator fan and wiring may be removed. Thermal
switches, water
temperature
sensor and
thermostat may be removed inside the cooling
system.
e. Radiator cap is free.
2.7.8.16 Air box
a. The air box must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modifications.
b. The air filter element may be modified or replaced
but must be mounted in the original position.
c. The air box drains must be sealed.
d. All motorcycles must have a closed breather
system. All oil breather lines must be
connected (may pass through an oil catch tank)
and exclusively discharge in the airbox.
e. Additional heat shielding is not allowed (i.e. heat
tape).
2.7.8.17 Fuel supply
a. Fuel pump and fuel pressure regulator must be the
originally fitted and homologated part with no
modification.
b. The fuel pressure must be as homologated.
c. Fuel lines from the fuel tank to the delivery pipe
assembly (delivery pipe excluded) may be replaced
and must be located in such a way that they are
protected from crash damage.
d. Quick connectors or dry break connectors may be
used.
e. Fuel vent lines may be replaced.
f. Fuel filters may be added.
2.7.8.18 Exhaust system
a. Exhaust pipes and silencers may be modified or
changed. Catalytic converters must be removed.
Page 142 of 213
b. The number of the final exhaust silencer(s) must
remain as homologated. The silencer(s) must be
on the same side(s) of the homologated model.
c. For safety reasons, the exposed edges of the
exhaust pipe(s) outlet must be rounded to avoid
any sharp edges.
d. Wrapping of exhaust systems is not allowed
except in the area of the rider’s foot or an area
in contact with the fairing for protection from heat.
e. The noise limit for Superstock is 107 dB/A (with a
3 dB/A tolerance after the race only). The test will
be carried out according to the details noted in Art
2.13.
2.7.9
Electrics and electronics
2.7.9.1
Ignition / Engine Control System (ECU)
a. The engine control system (ECU) must be an ECU
(Kit or OEM) applicable to the specific homologated
model. The ECU may have its software changed,
but the ECU may not be physically modified.
b. The system may have FIM/DWO/MotoAmerica
approved external ignition and/or injection
module/s added.
c. The total combined retail price (software and
tuning tools included) on sale to the general
public cannot be higher than €2500 (tax
excluded).
d. Central unit (ECU) may be relocated.
e. Optional equipment sold by the motorcycle
Manufacturer for the homologated model is
considered not homologated with the bike and
must follow the requirements for approved
electronics/data loggers.
f. During an event the Technical Director has the
right to ask a team to substitute their ECU or
external module with the sample received from the
Manufacturer. The change has to be done before
Sunday warm up.
g. No extra sensors may be added for control
strategies except shift rod sensor, wheel speed
sensors and lambda sensors. Wheel speed
sensors must be included in the Kit ECU and
Harness package if required.
h. The addition of an infrared (IR) or GPS based
lap timing system is allowed.
i. Data logging is not allowed. Lap timers using any
data recording with the exception of lap time are not
allowed.
j. Telemetry is not allowed.
Page 143 of 213
k. No remote or wireless connection to the bike for any
data exchange or setting is allowed whilst the
engine is running or the bike is moving.
l. Harness:
1. The main wiring harness may be replaced by
the kit wire harness as supplied for the Kit
ECU model, produced and/or approved by the
manufacturer of the motorcycle and by
FIM/DWO.
2. The key/ignition lock may be relocated, replaced
or removed.
3. Cutting of the original main wiring harness is
allowed.
m. To be approved, samples of the ECU kits, kit
harnesses and external modules with their tuning
tools must be sent by the Manufacturers to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director, with technical
data and selling price.
n. For the ignition and or injection module, or quick
shifter to be approved, samples must be sent by
the manufacturer of the device to the MotoAmerica
Technical Director with technical data and selling
price.
o. The original speedometer and tachometer may be
altered or replaced.
p. Spark plugs may be replaced.
q. Battery is free.
2.7.9.2
Generator, alternator, electric starter
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification allowed.
b. The stator must be fitted in its original position
and without offsetting.
c. The electric starter must operate normally and
always be able to start the engine during the
event.
d. During parc fermé the starter must crank the
engine at a suitable speed for starting for a
minimum of 2 seconds without the use of a
boost battery. No boost battery may be
connected to the machine after the end of the
session.
2.7.10
Main Frame
During the entire duration of the event, each rider can
only use one (1) complete motorcycle, as presented
for Technical Control, with the frame clearly identified
with a seal. In case the frame needs to be replaced,
Page 144 of 213
the rider or the team can request the use of a spare
frame to the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
The pre-assembled spare frame must be presented to
the MotoAmerica Technical Director to receive the
permission to rebuild the motorcycle. The preassembly of the frame shall be strictly limited to:
• Main frame
• Bearings (steering pip, swing arm, etc.)
• Swing arm
• Rear suspension linkage and shock absorber
• Upper and lower triple clamps
• Wiring harness
The spare frame will not be allowed in the pit box
before the rider or the team has received authorization
from the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
The motorcycle, once rebuilt, prior to use must be
inspected by the technical stewards for safety checks
and a new seal will be placed on the motorcycle
frame.
For a full explanation of the procedures see
article 2.5.10.
2.7.10.1 Frame body and rear sub frame
a. The frame must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
b. Holes may be drilled on the frame only to fix
approved components (i.e. fairing brackets,
steering damper mount, sensors).
c. The sides of the frame-body may be covered by a
protective part made of a composite material.
These protectors must fit the form of the frame.
d. Nothing else may be added or removed from the
frame body.
e. All motorcycles must display a vehicle
identification number punched on the frame body
(chassis number).
f. Engine mounting brackets or plates must remain as
originally produced by the manufacturer for the
homologated motorcycle.
g. Front sub frame / fairing mount may be changed or
altered.
h. Rear sub frame must remain as homologated but
additional seat brackets may be added.
i. Additional seat brackets may be added, nonstressed protruding brackets may be removed if
they do not affect the safety of the construction
Page 145 of 213
or assembly. Bolt-on accessories to the rear subframe may be removed.
j. The paint scheme is not restricted but polishing
the frame body or sub frame is not allowed.
2.7.10.2 Suspension - General
a. Participants in the Superstock class must only use
the approved and listed suspension units for that
season. The price limits are:
1. Fork: For the fork kit, including all parts such
as but not limited to cartridge, springs (1 set),
adjusters, fork caps, blanking inserts, seals,
bushes but excepting oil and fitting the price
limit is €2200 excluding tax.
2. Shock Absorber/RCU: For the complete
shock absorber / RCU including but not
limited to spring (1), pre-load adjuster and
length/ride height adjuster the price limit is
€2000 excluding tax.
b. The approved products from the suspension
manufacturers must be available to all participants
at least one month before the first round of the
MotoAmerica Superbike season, and remain
available all season. The products must be
available within 6 weeks of a confirmed order.
c. Setting parts and tuning parts must be provided by
the suspension manufacturers to all customers/
teams/ participants using the manufacturer’s
products. These parts can be used by all
participants during the season. These parts shall be
available for immediate delivery to all
teams/customers.
d. Teams may not modify any part of the forks or shock
absorber; all setting parts must be supplied by the
suspension manufacturer and available to all
teams/riders.
e. The suspension manufacturers are allowed to offer
service contracts when the team is using the
approved and listed suspension products. The
suspension manufacturers cannot demand a
service contract for a customer or participant in
order to obtain a suspension product.
f. Electronic Suspension:
1. No aftermarket or prototype electronicallycontrolled
suspensions
maybe
used.
Electronically-controlled suspension may
only be used if already present on the
production model of the homologated
motorcycle.
Page 146 of 213
2. The electronically-controlled valves must
remain as homologated. The shims, spacers
and fork/shock springs not connected with
these valves can be changed.
3. The ECU for the electronic suspension must
remain as homologated and cannot receive
any motorcycle track position or sector
information; the suspension cannot be
adjusted relative to track position.
4. The electronic interface between the rider and
the suspension must remain as on the
homologated motorcycle. It is allowed to
remove or disable this rider interface.
5. The original suspension system must work
safely in the event of an electronic failure.
6. Electro-magnetic fluid systems which change
the viscosity of the suspension fluid(s) during
operation are not permitted.
g. Electronic controlled steering damper cannot
be used if not installed in the homologated
model for road use. However, it must be
completely standard (any mechanical or
electronic part must remain as homologated).
2.7.10.3 Front Suspension
a. Forks must be the originally fitted and homologated
parts with the following modifications allowed:
b. Original internal parts of the homologated forks may
be modified or changed.
c. After market damper kits or valves may be installed.
d. Fork springs may be modified or replaced.
e. Fork caps may be modified or replaced to allow
external adjustment.
f. Dust seals may be modified, changed or removed if
the fork is totally oil-sealed.
g. The original surface finish of the fork tubes
(stanchions, fork pipes) may be changed. Additional
surface treatments are allowed.
h. The upper and lower fork clamps (triple clamp, fork
bridges, and stem) must remain as originally
produced by the manufacturer on the homologated
motorcycle.
i. A steering damper may be added or replaced with
an aftermarket damper.
j. The steering damper cannot act as a steering lock
limiting device.
Page 147 of 213
k. Electronic forks may have their complete internal
parts (including all electronic control) replaced with
a conventional damping system and it will be
considered as a mechanical fork.
2.7.10.4 Rear fork (Swing arm)
a. The rear fork must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed.
b. A chain guard must be fitted in such a way to
reduce the possibility that any part of the riders’
body may become trapped between the lower chain
run and the rear wheel sprocket.
c. Rear fork pivot bolt must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed.
d. Rear pivot position must remain in the
homologated position (as supplied on the
production bike). If the standard bike has
inserts, then the orientation/position of the original
insert may be changed but the insert cannot be
replaced or modified.
e. Rear wheel stand brackets may be added to the
rear fork by welding or by bolts. Brackets must have
rounded edges (with a large radius). Fastening
screws must be recessed. An anchorage system
or point(s) to keep the original rear brake caliper
in place may be added to the rear swing-arm.
f. The sides of the swing-arm may be protected by
a thin vinyl cover only, no composite or
structural covers are allowed.
2.7.10.5 Rear suspension unit
a. Rear suspension unit (shock absorber) may be
modified or replaced, but the original attachments
to the frame and rear fork (swing arm) must be
as homologated.
b. All the rear suspension linkage parts must be the
originally fitted and homologated part with no
modification allowed.
c. Removable top shock mounts must be the
originally fitted and homologated part with no
modification allowed. A nut may be made
captive on the top shock mount and shim
spacers may be fitted behind it to adjust ride
height.
2.7.10.6 Wheels
a. Wheels must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed.
b. A non-slip coating / treatment may be applied to the
bead area of the rim.
Page 148 of 213
c. If the original design includes a cushion drive for
the rear wheel, it must remain as originally
produced for the homologated motorcycle.
d. Wheel axles must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed,
wheel spacers may be modified or replaced.
e. Wheel balance weights may be discarded, changed
or added.
f. Any inflation valves may be used.
2.7.10.7 Brakes
a. Brake discs may be replaced by aftermarket discs
which comply with following requirements:
1. Only steel (max. carbon content 2.1 wt. %) is
allowed for brake discs.
2. Carrier must retain the same material as
the homologated disc and carrier.
3. The outside and inner diameters of the brake
disc must not be larger than the ones on the
homologated disc.
4. The thickness of the brake disc may be
increased but the disc must fit into the
homologated brake caliper without any
modification. The number of floaters is free.
5. The fixing of the carrier on the wheel must
remain the same as on the homologated disc.
b. The front and rear brake caliper (mount, carrier,
hanger) must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
c. In order to reduce the transfer of heat to the
hydraulic fluid it is permitted to add metallic shims
to the calipers, between the pads and the calipers,
and/or to replace light alloy pistons with steel
pistons made by the same manufacturer of the
caliper.
d. The rear brake caliper bracket may be mounted
fixed on the swing- arm, but the bracket must
maintain the same mounting (fixing) points for the
caliper as used on the homologated motorcycle.
e. The front and rear master cylinder must remain as
originally produced by the manufacturer for the
homologated motorcycle. Front and rear brake
fluid reservoirs may be changed.
f. Front and rear hydraulic brake lines may be
changed.
g. The split of the front brake lines for both front
brake calipers must be made above the lower fork
bridge (lower triple clamp).
Page 149 of 213
h. "Quick" (or "dry-brake") connectors in the brake
lines are allowed.
i. Front and rear brake pads may be changed.
Brake pad locking pins may be modified for quick
change type.
j. Additional air scoops or ducts are not allowed.
k. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) must be
removed.
l. Motorcycles must be equipped with brake lever
protection, intended to protect the handlebar brake
lever from being accidentally activated in case of
collision with another motorcycle. Composite
guards are not permitted. FIM approved guards
will be permitted without regard to the material.
m. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
guard not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.7.10.8 Handlebars and hand controls
a. Handlebars may be replaced (except for the brake
master cylinder).
b. Handlebars and hand controls may be relocated.
c. Throttle controls must be self-closing when not held
by the hand.
d. Throttle assembly and associated cables may be
modified or replaced but the connection to the
throttle body and to the throttle controls must
remain as on the homologated motorcycle.
e. Clutch and brake lever may be replaced with an
after-market model. An adjuster to the brake lever
is allowed.
f. Switches may be changed but the electric starter
switch and engine stop switch must be located on
the handlebars.
g. Motorcycles must be equipped with a functional
ignition kill switch or button mounted on the
right hand handlebar (within reach of the hand
while on the hand grips) that is capable of stopping
a running engine. The button or switch must be
RED.
2.7.10.9 Foot rest / Foot controls
a. Foot rests, hangers/brackets and hardware may
be
replaced
and
relocated
but
the
hangers/brackets must be mounted to their
original frame mounting points.
b. Foot controls: gear shift and rear brake must
remain operated manually by foot.
Page 150 of 213
c. Foot rests may be rigidly mounted or a folding
type which must incorporate a device to return
them to the normal position.
d. The end of the foot rest must have at least
an 8 mm solid spherical radius.
e. Non folding footrests must have an end (plug)
which is permanently fixed, made of aluminum,
plastic, Teflon® or an equivalent type material
(minimum radius 8mm). The plug surface must be
designed to reach the widest possible area. The
MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right to
refuse any plug not satisfying this safety aim.
2.7.10.10 Fuel tank
a. Fuel tank must be the originally fitted and
homologated part with no modification allowed.
b. All fuel tanks must be completely filled with fire
retardant material (i.e. fuel tank foam).
c. Fuel tanks with tank breather pipes must be fitted
with non-return valves that discharge into a catch
tank with a minimum volume of 250cc made of a
suitable material.
d. Fuel caps may be changed. Fuel caps when
closed must be leak proof. Additionally, they must
be securely locked to prevent accidental opening at
any time.
e. A rider spacer/pad may be fitted to the rear of
the tank with non-permanent adhesive. It may
be constructed of foam padding or composite
material.
f. The tank may not have a cover fitted over it
unless the homologated machine also features
a full cover.
g. The sides of the fuel tank may be protected
with a cover made of a composite material.
These covers must fit the shape of the fuel tank.
2.7.10.11 Fairing / Bodywork
a. Fairing and bodywork may be replaced with exact
cosmetic duplicates of the original parts, but must
appear to be as originally produced by the
manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle, with
slight differences due to the racing use (different
pieces mix, fixing points, fairing bottom, etc.). The
material may be changed. The use of carbon fiber
or carbon composite materials is not allowed.
Specific reinforcements in Kevlar® or carbon are
allowed locally around holes and stressed areas.
Headlights must be included even when
considered external.
Page 151 of 213
b. Overall size and dimensions must be the same as
the original part, with a tolerance of +-10mm,
respecting the design and features of the
homologated fairing as far as possible. The
overall width of the frontal area may be +10mm
maximum. The decision of the Technical
Director is final.
c. Wind screen may be replaced with an aftermarket
product. The height of the windscreen is free,
within a tolerance of +/- 15 mm referred to the
vertical distance from/to the upper fork bridge. The
screen must conform to the same profile from
the front as the original – no double bubble or
wide types. From a top view the length of the
windscreen may be shortened by 25mm to allow
clearance for the rider. The edge of the screen
must have no sharp edges
d. Motorcycles that are not originally equipped with
streamlining are not allowed to add streamlining
in any form, with the exception of a lower fairing
device, as described in point (h). This device cannot
exceed above a line drawn horizontally from
wheel axle to wheel axle and must follow the
specifications described at point (h and i).
e. The
original
combination
instrument/fairing
brackets may be replaced, but the use of titanium
and carbon (or similar composite materials) is
forbidden. All other fairing brackets may be altered
or replaced.
f. The ram-air intake must maintain the originally
homologated shape and dimensions.
g. The original air ducts running between the fairing
and the air box may be altered or replaced.
Carbon fiber composites and other exotic
materials are forbidden. Particle grills or “wiremeshes” originally installed in the openings for
the air ducts may be removed.
h. The lower fairing must to be constructed to hold,
in case of an engine breakdown minimum 6
liters. The lower edge of all the openings in the
fairing must be positioned at least 70 mm above the
bottom of the fairing.
i. The upper edge of the rear transverse wall of the
lower fairing must be at least 70 mm above the
bottom. The angle between this wall and the floor
must be ≤ 90°.
j. Original openings for cooling in the lateral
fairing/bodywork sections may be partially closed
only to accommodate sponsors' logos/lettering.
Such modification shall be made using wire mesh
or perforated plate. The material is free but the
distance between all opening centers, circle
Page 152 of 213
centers and their diameters must be constant. Holes
or perforations must have an open area ratio > 60%.
k. Motorcycles may be equipped with a radiator shroud
(inner ducts) to improve the air stream towards the
radiator but the appearance of the front, the rear and
the profile of the motorcycle must not be changed.
l. The lower fairing must incorporate a single opening
of Ø 25 mm diameter in the front lower area. This
hole must remain sealed in dry conditions and must
be only opened in wet race conditions as
declared by the Race Director.
m.Front mudguards may be replaced with a cosmetic
duplicate of the original parts and may be spaced
upward for increased tire clearance.
n. Rear mudguard fixed on the swing arm may
be modified, changed or removed.
2.7.10.12 Seat
a. Seat, seat base and associated bodywork may be
replaced. The appearance from front, rear and
profile must conform to the homologated shape.
b. The top portion of the rear bodywork around the
seat may be modified to a solo seat.
c. The homologated seat locking system (with plates,
pins, rubber pads etc.) may be removed.
d. Same material as the fairing must be used. (Art.
2.7.10.11a)
e. All exposed edges must be rounded.
2.7.10.13 Rear Safety Light
All motorcycles must have a functioning red light
mounted at the rear of the machine, this light must
be switched on any time the motorcycle is on the
track or being ridden in the pit-lane and the session
is declared WET. All lights must comply with the
following:
a. Lighting direction must be parallel to the machine
center line (motorcycle running direction), and be
clearly visible from the rear at least 15 degrees to
both left and right sides of the machine center line.
b. The rear light must be mounted near the end of
the seat/rear bodywork and approximately on the
machine center line, in a position approved by the
Technical Director. In case of dispute over the
mounting position or visibility, the decision of the
Technical Director will be final.
Page 153 of 213
c. Power
output/luminosity
equivalent
to
approximately: 10 – 15 (incandescent), 0.6 – 1.8 W
(LED).
d. The output must be continuous - no flashing
safety light whilst on track, flashing is allowed in
the pit lane when pit limiter is active.
e. Safety light power supply may be separated from
the motorcycle.
f. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
light system not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.7.10.14 Fasteners
a. Standard fasteners may be replaced with
fasteners of any material and design but titanium
fasteners cannot be used. The strength and
design must be equal to or exceed the strength of
the standard fastener.
b. Fasteners may be drilled for safety wire, but
intentional weight-reduction modifications are not
allowed.
c. Thread repairs may be made using inserts of
different material such as Helicoils® and
Timeserts®.
d. Fairing / bodywork fasteners may be replaced
with the quick disconnect type.
e. Aluminum fasteners may only be used in nonstructural locations.
2.7.11
The following items MAY be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle
a. Any type of lubrication, brake or suspension fluid
may be used.
b. Gaskets and gasket materials.
c. Instruments, instrument bracket(s) and associated
cables.
d. Painted external surface finishes and decals.
e. Material for brackets connecting non original parts
(fairing, exhaust, instruments, etc.) to the frame (or
engine) cannot be made from titanium or fiber
reinforced composites excepting the exhaust
silencer hanger that may be in carbon.
f. Protective covers for the frame, chain, footrests,
etc. may be made in other materials like fiber
composite material if these parts do not replace
original parts mounted on the homologated model.
Page 154 of 213
2.7.12
The following items MAY BE Removed
a. Emission control items (anti-pollution) in or around
the air box and engine (O2 sensors, air injection
devices).
b. Tachometer.
c. Speedometer.
d. Bolt-on accessories on a rear sub frame.
2.7.13
The following items MUST BE Removed
a. Headlamp, rear lamp and turn signal indicators
(when not incorporated in the fairing). Openings
must be covered by suitable materials.
b. Rear-view mirrors.
c. Horn.
d. License plate bracket.
e. Toolkit.
f. Helmet hooks and luggage carrier hooks.
g. Passenger foot rests.
h. Passenger grab rails.
i. Safety bars, center and side stands must be
removed (fixed brackets must remain).
2.7.14
The following items MUST BE Altered
a. All drain plugs must be wired. External oil filter(s)
screws and bolts that enter an oil cavity must be
safety wired (i.e. on crankcases).
b. Where breather or overflow pipes are fitted they
must discharge via existing outlets. The original
closed system must be retained: no direct
atmospheric emission is permitted.
c. The original closed system must be retained: no
direct atmospheric emission is permitted.
d. Motorcycles must be equipped with a red light
on the instrument panel that will illuminate in the
event of oil pressure drop (Yamaha R6 exempted).
Page 155 of 213
KTM RC CUP TECHNICAL REGULATIONS
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
2.8.7
2.8.8
2.8.9
2.8.10
KTM RC CUP TECH REGULATIONS
MOTORCYCLE SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE CONFIGURATIONS
MINIMUM WEIGHT
NUMBERS & NUMBER PLATES
FUEL
TIRES
ENGINE
ELECTRICS & ELECTRONICS
MAIN FRAME
ITEMS MAY BE ALTERED/ REPLACED
Page 156 of 213
156
156
156
156
158
158
158
150
162
163
169
2.8
KTM RC CUP TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The following rules are intended to permit limited
changes to the homologated motorcycle in the
interests of safety and improved competition between
various motorcycle concepts.
EVERYTHING THAT IS NOT AUTHORIZED AND
PRESCRIBED IN THIS RULE IS STRICTLY
FORBIDDEN
If a change to a part or system is not specifically
allowed in any of the following articles, then it is
forbidden
KTM RC Cup motorcycles will be checked
randomly for conformity of the rules.
Only KTM RC Cup bikes meeting the specifications
of the KTM RC Cup powered by KTM and delivered
officially for the series by KTM shall be allowed.
The appearance from the front, rear and the profile of
KTM RC Cup motorcycles must (except when
otherwise stated) conform to the homologated
shape (as originally produced by the manufacturer).
2.8.1
Motorcycle specifications
All parts and systems not specifically mentioned in
the following articles must remain as originally
produced by KTM for the KTM RC Cup specific race
model.
2.8.2
Engine
configurations
capacities
and
displacement
The following engine configurations comprise the KTM
RC Cup class:
373.2 cc 4-stroke 1 cylinder
The displacement capacity bore and stroke (new),
must remain at the homologated size.
2.8.3
Minimum weight
KTM RC 390 140kg (308.6lb)
At any time of the event, the weight of the whole
motorcycle (including the tank and its contents) must
not be lower than the minimum weight.
There is no tolerance on the minimum weight of the
motorcycle.
During the final technical inspection at the end of the
race, the selected motorcycles will be weighed in
the condition they finished the race, and the
established weight limit must be met in this condition.
Nothing may be added to the motorcycle. This
includes all fluids.
Page 157 of 213
During the practice and qualifying sessions, riders
may be asked to submit their motorcycle to a weight
control. In all cases the rider must comply with
this request.
2.8.4
Numbers and Number Plates
The background colors and figures (numbers) for
KTM RC Cup are Yellow Background (pantone
yellow) with Black Numbers.
The sizes for all the front numbers are:
Minimum height:
100 mm
Minimum width:
55 mm
Minimum stroke:
15 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
The sizes for all the side numbers are:
Minimum height:
100 mm
Minimum width:
55 mm
Minimum stroke:
15 mm
Minimum space between numbers:
10 mm
The allocated number (& plate) for the rider must be
affixed on the motorcycle as follows:
a. Once on the front, either in the center of the fairing
or slightly off to one side. The number must be
centered on the yellow background with no
advertising within 25mm in all directions.
b. Once, on each side of the motorcycle. The
preferred location for the numbers on each side
of the motorcycle is on the lower rear portion of the
main fairing near the bottom. The number must
be centered on the yellow background. Any
change to this position must be pre-approved a
minimum of 2 weeks before the first race by the
MotoAmerica Technical Director.
c. The numbers must use the fonts as detailed in Art.
2.14. Any numbers not using these fonts must have
the design of the numbers and the layout preapproved by the MotoAmerica Technical Director a
minimum of 2 weeks before the first race. All digits
must be of standard form.
d. Any outlines must be of a contrasting color and the
maximum width of the outline is 3mm. The
background color must be clearly visible around all
edges of the number (including outline). Reflective
or mirror type numbers are not permitted.
Page 158 of 213
e. Numbers cannot overlap.
In case of a dispute concerning the legibility of
numbers, the decision of the MotoAmerica
Technical Director will be final.
2.8.5
Fuel
Specified in Article: 2.9
2.8.6
Tires
a. The KTM RC Cup series approved Dunlop tires
must be used and are as follows:
1. Dry Tires – DOT All Tracks
 Front - 110/70ZR17 ALPHA 13 SP
 Rear - 150/60ZR17 ALPHA 13 SP
2. Rain Tires
 Rain Front - 110/70R17 KR189 WA
 Rain Rear - 140/65R17 KR389 WA
b. The maximum number of tires, of any type,
available to each rider during the event will be
specified in Article 2.3.7.
c. For the KTM RC Cup race only, wet tires will not
need to be marked with a tire sticker. They will
not be considered in the total number of tires
available for use, However normal allocation limits
still apply.
d. Every tire used during the event must be marked
with an adhesive sticker with a number allocated
by the MotoAmerica Technical Director. The
sticker will be a different color front and rear.
e. The tire stickers will be delivered to the teams in
a sealed envelope, on the day before the first
practice after which the teams will be responsible
for their use.
f. Officials will check that all the motorcycles in the
pit lane are fitted with tires carrying the sticker.
g. Stickers must be mounted to the left sidewall.
h. The use of motorcycles without the official
stickers will be immediately reported to the Race
Direction whom will take appropriate action.
i. Any modification or treatment (cutting, grooving) is
forbidden.
j. At the beginning of the event, the Official Supplier
may be requested by the MotoAmerica Technical
Director to deliver to him four (4) samples of each
type of tire to be used at the event.
Page 159 of 213
k. The allocation of individual tires will be made on a
random basis, with no involvement of any
representative from the tire supplier, teams or
riders. Those tires will be individually identified and
may not be exchanged between riders, including
between team mates, and may not be
exchanged by the tire supplier after the allocation,
except with the permission of the Race Direction.
l. In exceptional cases, should the sticker be
damaged or applied in the wrong way, up to 2
extra stickers may be provided at the sole discretion
of the MotoAmerica Technical Director. However,
the damaged sticker must be returned to the
MotoAmerica Technical Director and/or the tire it
was applied to, must be absolutely intact.
2.8.7
Engine
2.8.7.1
Fuel injection system
Fuel injection systems refer to throttle bodies, fuel
injectors, variable length intake tract devices, fuel
pump and fuel pressure regulator.
a. The fuel injection system must maintain the
configuration that KTM delivers the machines with
and cannot be altered or changed.
b. The fuel injectors must be stock and unaltered from
the original specification and manufacture.
c. Bell mouths must remain as originally produced
by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle.
d. Butterfly valves cannot be changed or modified.
e. Air and air/fuel mixture must exclusively enter
the combustion chamber through the throttle body
butterflies.
2.8.7.2
Cylinder Head
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
b. The cylinder head and cover must have the official
tech seal intact.
2.8.7.3
Camshaft
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.8.7.4
Cam sprockets or gears
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.8.7.5
Cylinders
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
Page 160 of 213
2.8.7.6
Pistons
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.8.7.7
Piston rings
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.8.7.8
Piston pins and clips
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.8.7.9
Connecting rods
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.8.7.10 Crankshaft
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.8.7.11 Crankcase / Gearbox housing
a. Must be the originally fitted and homologated part
with no modification.
2.8.7.11.1 Lateral covers and protection
a. Lateral (side) covers may be altered, modified or
replaced. If altered or modified, the cover must
have at least the same resistance to impact as
the original. If replaced, the cover must be made
in material of same or higher specific weight and
the total weight of the cover must not be less than
the original.
b. All lateral covers/engine cases containing oil and
which could be in contact with the ground during
a crash, must be either replaced by a ‘heavier’
engine cover or protected by a second cover made
from metal such as aluminum alloy, stainless steel,
steel or titanium, or an approved cover.
c. Any secondary covers must cover a minimum of
1/3 of the original cover. It must have no sharp
edges to damage the track surface. These covers
must be fixed properly and securely with a
minimum of three (3) case cover screws that
also mount the original covers/engine cases to
the crankcases.
d. Plates or crash bars made from aluminum or steel
also are permitted in addition to these covers.
All of these devices must be designed to be
resistant against sudden shocks, abrasions and
crash damage.
e. Oil containing engine case must be secured
with steel bolts.
Page 161 of 213
f. FIM approved covers will be permitted without
regard of the material or dimensions.
g. These covers must be fixed properly and securely
with case cover screws that also mount the original
covers/engine cases to the crankcases.
h. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
cover not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.8.7.12 Transmission / Gearbox
a. Transmission or gearbox must be the originally fitted
and homologated part with no modification.
b. OEM shift drum detent star must remain as
homologated but the detent arm and spring may
be modified or replaced.
c. The sprocket cover may be modified or eliminated.
d. Final drive sprockets may be changed.
e. Sprockets can be made of aluminum or steel.
f. Chain must remain a 520 size O-ring style chain.
2.8.7.13 Clutch
a. The homologated non-back torque limiting or back
torque limiting clutch may be used.
b. 2015 KTM RC Cup motorcycles equipped with a
non-back torque limiting clutch may be updated to
the 2016 KTM RC Cup Back torque limiting clutch.
The following part numbers must be used for the
conversion:
Qty
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
Part Number
90232101044
90232102000
90232111010
90232103000
90232105000
90232101101
J625069020
90232006000
90232004000
Description
Clutch Cage
Inner Clutch Hub
Clutch Kit 390
Pressure Plate
Clutch Springs
HH Screw M6x35
Ball Bearing 6902
Stopper Plate
Spring Seat
c. No other modifications are allowed.
d. Replacement clutch parts (ie friction plates, steel
plates,
springs,
etc.)
must remain as
homologated.
2.8.7.14 Oil pumps and oil lines
a. No pump or oil line modifications are allowed.
2.8.7.15 Radiator, cooling system and oil cooler
a. The only liquid engine coolants permitted is water.
Page 162 of 213
b. Protective meshes may be added in front of the oil
and/or water radiator(s).
c. The cooling system hoses and catch tanks may be
changed.
d. Radiator cap is free.
2.8.7.16 Air box
a. The air box must remain as originally produced
by the manufacturer on the homologated
motorcycle.
b. The air filter element may be replaced but must be
included on the approved air filter list.
c. The air box drains must be sealed. Drains may be
open during wet conditions only.
d. All motorcycles must have a closed breather
system. All oil breather lines must be connected
and discharge in the airbox.
2.8.7.17 Fuel supply
a. Fuel pump and fuel pressure regulator must remain
as homologated.
b. The fuel pressure must be as homologated.
c. Fuel lines from the fuel tank to the delivery pipe
assembly (excluded) may be replaced.
d. Fuel vent lines may be replaced.
2.8.7.18 Exhaust system
a. The MotoAmerica approved KTM RC Cup
Akrapovic exhaust system is the only system that
can be used.
b. The catalytic converter may be removed. If
removed the intermediate exhaust pipe must be
replaced with P/N 90805908000. No other
modifications are allowed.
c. Wrapping of exhaust systems is not allowed
except in the area of the rider’s foot or an area
in contact with the fairing for protection from heat.
d. The silencer noise insert may be removed.
2.8.7.19 Lubrication system
The MotoAmerica approved KTM RC Cup Motorex
“POWER SYNT 4T Fully Synthetic 10w/50” engine
oil must be used.
2.8.8
Electrics and electronics
2.8.8.1
Ignition / Engine Control System (ECU)
a. The engine control system (ECU) must be the
original system as homologated.
Page 163 of 213
b. Optional equipment sold by the motorcycle
Manufacturer for the homologated model is
considered not homologated.
c. During an event the Technical Director has the
right to ask a team to substitute their ECU with
the sample received from the Manufacturer. The
change has to be done before Sunday warm up.
d. No extra sensors may be added for control
strategies.
e. The addition of an infrared (IR) or GPS based
lap timing system is allowed.
f. Data logging is not allowed. Lap timers using any
data recording with the exception of lap time are not
allowed.
g. Telemetry is not allowed.
h. No remote or wireless connection to the bike for any
data exchange or setting is allowed whilst the
engine is running or the bike is moving.
i. Harness:
1. No modifications to the main harness are
allowed.
2. An on/off circuit may be added for the rain light.
3. The key/ignition lock may be relocated,
replaced or removed however, the main
harness cannot be altered or cut.
j. Spark plugs may be replaced.
k. Battery is free.
2.8.8.2
Generator, alternator, electric starter
a. No modifications are allowed.
b. The electric starter must operate normally and
always be able to start the engine during the event.
2.8.9
Main frame and spare frame
During the entire duration of the event, each rider can
only use one (1) complete motorcycle, as presented
for Technical Control, with the frame clearly identified
with a seal. In case the frame will need to be replaced
the rider or the team can request the use of a spare
frame to the MotoAmerica Technical Director. The
spare frame must be inspected before assembly can
begin.
The spare frame will not be allowed in the pit box
before the rider or the team has received
authorization from the MotoAmerica Technical
Director.
Page 164 of 213
The rebuilt motorcycle must be inspected before its
use by the technical stewards for safety checks and
a new seal will be placed on the motorcycle frame.
No other spare machine may be at the track. If
found penalties will be applied. For the remainder
of the event the machine will be impounded and
no part of that machine may be used for spare
parts.
In extraordinary circumstances the technical
director may give permission for the KTM supplied
spare machine to be used if it is felt the damaged
machined cannot be repaired safely and in the
available time.
See 2.5.10 for the explanation of the procedures.
2.8.9.1
Frame body and rear sub frame
a. The frame must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
b. The sides of the frame-body may be covered by a
protective part made of a composite material.
These protectors must fit the form of the frame.
c. Nothing else may be added or removed from the
frame body.
d. All motorcycles must display a vehicle
identification number punched on the frame body
(chassis number).
e. Engine mounting brackets or plates must remain as
originally produced by the manufacturer for the
homologated motorcycle.
f. The frame paint scheme is restricted to the original
KTM orange.
2.8.9.2
Front Suspension
a. Forks (stanchions, stem, wheel spindle, upper
and lower crown, etc.) must remain as originally
produced by
the manufacturer
for
the
homologated motorcycle.
b. The upper and lower fork clamps (triple clamp, fork
bridges) must remain as originally produced by the
manufacturer on the homologated motorcycle.
c. Steering stem pivot position must remain in the
homologated position (as
supplied on the
production bike).
d. Original internal parts of the homologated forks
may not be modified or changed.
e. Springs may be changed with the following:
1. 7040-9005 Fork spring 7.0
Page 165 of 213
2. 7040-9006 Fork spring 7.5
3. 7040-9007 Fork spring 8.0
4. 9701-0029 Fork spring 8.5
5. 9701-0030 Fork spring 9.0
f. Oil weight/height may be changed.
g. Additional surface treatments are not allowed.
h. Modifications to the pistons, valve stacks, or
oil passage ways is not allowed.
2.8.9.3
Rear fork (Swing arm)
a. The rear fork must remain as originally produced
by the manufacturer for the homologated
motorcycle.
b. A stock or aftermarket chain guard must be fitted
in such a way to reduce the possibility that any
part of the riders’ body may become trapped
between the lower chain run and the rear wheel
sprocket.
2.8.9.4
Rear suspension unit
a. All rear suspension linkage parts must remain as
originally produced by the manufacturer for the
homologated motorcycle.
b. Rear suspension unit cannot be changed.
c. Normal
service
components
(seals,
bushings) may be changed or replaced.
oil,
d. Springs may be changed with the following:
1. 7018-9001 Shock spring 72/130
2. 7018-9002 Shock spring 74/130
3. 7018-9003 Shock spring 76/130
4. 7018-9004 Shock spring 78/130
5. 7018-9005 Shock spring 80/130
6. 7018-9006 Shock spring 82/130
7. 7018-9007 Shock spring 84/130
8. 7018-9008 Shock spring 86/130
e. Modifications to the pistons, valve stacks, or
oil passage ways is not allowed.
2.8.9.5
Wheels
a. Wheels must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
b. A non-slip coating / treatment may be applied to the
bead area of the rim.
Page 166 of 213
c. The original KTM RC Cup orange paint must remain
as homologated.
d. Wheel axles and bearings must remain as
homologated, wheel spacers may be modified or
replaced.
e. Wheel balance weights may be discarded, changed
or added to.
f. Any inflation valves may be used.
2.8.9.6
Brakes
a. Brake discs must remain as homologated.
b. The front and rear brake caliper (mount, carrier,
hanger) must remain as originally produced by
the manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle.
c. The front and rear master cylinder must remain as
originally produced by the manufacturer for the
homologated motorcycle.
d. Front and rear brake fluid reservoirs may be
changed with aftermarket products.
e. Front and rear hydraulic brake lines may not be
changed.
f. Front and rear brake pads can only be replaced
with the homologated brake pads (part#
90813030000 or 90113030000).
g. Additional air scoops or ducts are not allowed.
h. Motorcycles must be equipped with brake lever
protection, intended to protect the handlebar brake
lever from being accidentally activated in case of
collision with another motorcycle. Composite
guards are not permitted with the exception of the
original equipment as delivered by KTM. FIM
approved guards will be permitted without regard
to the material.
i. The Mo toAmeric a Technical Director has the
right to refuse any guard not satisfying this safety
purpose.
2.8.9.7
Handlebars and hand controls
a. Handlebars may be replaced with homologated or
aftermarket parts.
b. The original mounting location for the handle bars
must be used.
c. Throttle controls must be self-closing when not held
by the hand.
d. Throttle assembly and associated cables may not
be modified or replaced.
e. Clutch and brake lever may be replaced.
Page 167 of 213
f. Switches may be changed but the electric starter
switch and engine stop switch must be located on
the handlebars.
g. Motorcycles must be equipped with a functional
ignition kill switch or button mounted on the
right hand handlebar (within reach of the hand
while on the hand grips) that is capable of stopping
a running engine. The button or switch must be
RED.
2.8.9.8
Foot rest / Foot controls
a. Foot rests, hangers/brackets and hardware may
be replaced and relocated but the hangers
/brackets must be mounted to their original
frame mounting points.
b. Foot controls: gear shift and rear brake must
remain operated manually by foot.
c. Foot rests may be rigidly mounted or a folding
type which must incorporate a device to return
them to the normal position.
d. The end of the foot rest must have at least
an 8 mm solid spherical radius.
e. Non folding footrests must have an end (plug)
which is permanently fixed, made of aluminum,
plastic, Teflon® or an equivalent type material
(minimum radius 8mm). The plug surface must be
designed to reach the widest possible area. The
MotoAmerica Technical Director has the right to
refuse any plug not satisfying this safety aim.
2.8.9.9
Fuel tank
a. Fuel tank must remain as originally produced by
KTM for the homologated motorcycle.
b. The sides of the fuel tank may be protected
with a cover made of a composite material.
These covers must fit the shape of the fuel tank.
2.8.9.10 Fairing / Bodywork
a. Fairing, bodywork, and windscreen must be as
originally fitted on KTM RC Cup model motorcycle.
b. The rear fender upper cover may be removed or
modified only for the purpose of accessing rear
shock adjustments.
2.8.9.11 Seat
Seat padding may be replaced with parts of similar
appearance as
originally produced by the
manufacturer for the homologated motorcycle. The
appearance from the front, rear and profile must
conform to the homologated shape.
Page 168 of 213
2.8.9.12 Rear Safety Light
All motorcycles must have a functioning red light
mounted at the rear of the machine, this light must
be switched on any time the motorcycle is on the
track or being ridden in the pit-lane and the session is
declared WET. All lights may be the KTM light as
originally supplied or comply with the following:
a. Lighting direction must be parallel to the machine
center line (motorcycle running direction), and be
clearly visible from the rear at least 15 degrees to
both left and right sides of the machine center line.
b. The rear light must be mounted near the end of
the seat/rear bodywork and approximately on the
machine center line, in a position approved by the
Technical Director. In case of dispute over the
mounting position or visibility, the decision of the
Technical Director will be final.
c. Power
output/luminosity
equivalent
to
approximately: 10 – 15 (incandescent), 0.6 – 1.8 W
(LED).
d. The output must be continuous - no flashing
safety light whilst on track, flashing is allowed in
the pit lane when pit limiter is active.
e. Safety light power supply may be separated from
the motorcycle.
f. The Technical Director has the right to refuse any
light system not satisfying this safety purpose.
2.8.9.13 Fasteners
a. Standard fasteners may be replaced with
fasteners of any material and design but titanium
fasteners cannot be used. The strength and
design must be equal to or exceed the strength of
the standard fastener.
b. Fasteners may be drilled for safety wire, but
intentional weight-reduction modifications are not
allowed.
c. Threads may be repaired using inserts of
different material such as Helicoils® and
Timeserts®.
d. Fairing / bodywork fasteners may be replaced with
the quick disconnect type.
e. Aluminum fasteners may only be used in nonstructural locations.
Page 169 of 213
2.8.10
The following items MAY be altered or replaced
from those fitted to the homologated motorcycle
a. Any type of lubrication, brake or suspension fluid
may be used with the exception of engine oil.
b. Material for brackets connecting non original parts
(fairing, exhaust, instruments, etc.) to the frame (or
engine) cannot be made from titanium or fiber
reinforced composites.
c. Protective covers for the frame, chain, footrests,
etc. may be made in other materials like fiber
composite material if these parts do not replace
original parts mounted on the homologated model.
d. The OEM chain guard may be modified for the
purpose of making rear wheel changes more
efficient as long as the chain guard still functions as
intended.
Page 170 of 213
2.9
FUEL, OIL AND COOLANTS
All motorcycles must be fueled with Sunoco Apex.
2.9.1
Air
Only ambient air may be mixed with the fuel as an
oxidant.
2.9.2
Primary Tests
a. The AMA/FIMNA may require tests of fuels to be
administered before, or at the time of delivery to, an
event at which such fuels are to be used.
b. Fuel companies supplying fuels to participating
teams must submit ten liters (2 x 5 L) to the
laboratory appointed by the AMA/FIMNA for
analysis in accordance with the specification.
Providing the fuel is within the specification, a
certificate containing a test report number will be
issued to the fuel company. The fuel company must
provide a copy of the test report number to the
appropriate rider/teams before they take part in a
race.
Contact
for
fuel
analysis
[email protected]
2.9.3
Fuel Sampling and Testing
a. The MotoAmerica Technical Director has the sole
responsibility for the administration and supervision
during the taking of fuel samples.
b. The preferred fuel test method is
chromatography or GC Fingerprint method.
gas
c. Gas chromatography (GC) is an analytical
technique for separating compounds based
primarily on their volatility and polarity. Gas
chromatography provides both qualitative and
quantitative information for individual compounds
present in a sample. Gas chromatography is widely
used for the analysis of fuels.
d. The GC Fingerprint is a comparison between the
given reference and the fuel drawn from the
competitor. With the fingerprint method any
changes in composition and concentration of the
fuel against the reference is detected. The
separation is done with a non-polar column suitable
for fuel analysis. The detection of the components
is done with a flame ionization detector.
e. If other test methods are required, fuel samples will
be transported to the appointed laboratory by an
official courier, using the appropriate containers.
f. Riders selected for fuel controls will be directed with
their motorcycles to the inspection area.
g. Only new sample bottles will be used for the fuel
samples.
Page 171 of 213
h. The fuel to be tested will be transferred into three
bottles (3 small sample containers), marked A, B
and C, and identified by reference to the motorcycle
from which the sample was taken. The bottles will
be closed, sealed and labelled by the MotoAmerica
Technical Director and/or the Fuel Analysts.
i. The Fuel Sample Declaration form will be filled out
immediately, containing all information as shown on
the sample sheet, including the riders’ name and
race number, date and place of fuel sampling. A
responsible team member will sign this declaration,
after verifying that all information is correct.
j. Sample A and B will be given to the appointed
laboratory staff, present at the event for analysis or
be sent to the respective laboratory by the organizer
if no trackside laboratory is available. Sample B will
be kept by the laboratory staff as a retained sample
in case of a dispute. All samples will be
accompanied by a copy of the Fuel Sample
Declaration form. Costs for the analyses of sample
A and B will be paid by MotoAmerica.
k. Sample C will be handed over to the AMA/FIMNA
for safeguarding in case of protests and/or
requirement of a counter-expertise by the
AMA/FIMNA appointed laboratory, accompanied by
a copy of the Fuel Sample Declaration form. Costs
for the analyses of sample C will be paid by the
team concerned.
l. As soon as possible after receipt of the samples and
completing
the
testing,
the
Fuel
Analyst/AMA/FIMNA appointed laboratory will
report the results of the fuel sample analyses
directly to the MotoAmerica Technical Director.
m. In the case of non-conformity, the MotoAmerica
Technical Director must notify the results to
MotoAmerica, the Race Direction and the
rider/team representative concerned. Failure of the
sample to correspond to the controlled fuel will
result in the disqualification of the competitor. The
result of the competitor's fuel sample analysis ("A"
or "B" sample) more favorable to the competitor will
be taken into account.
n. Within 48 hours of the receipt of the notification of
the results of the test of sample A and/or B, the team
must notify MotoAmerica and the MotoAmerica
Technical Director if a counter-expertise is required
(or not required) for sample C.
o. The Race Direction will take a decision at the
Superbike, Supersport and Superstock event
immediately following the notification of the results
of the final expertise. Any appeal against the
decision of the Race Direction will be heard by the
FIMNA Stewards appointed for the Superbike,
Page 172 of 213
Supersport and Superstock event at which the Race
Direction decision is taken. This will take place after
the C sample has been analyzed.
2.9.4
Fuel Storage
a. Fuel must only be stored in metal, sealable
containers in the competitor's pit.
b. Firefighting equipment, protective devices and staff
must conform to the requirements imposed by the
local authorities and by-laws.
c. The organizer must have fire extinguishers of a size
and type approved by the local by-laws, available to
each competitor in the pit area.
2.9.5
Coolants
The only liquid engine coolants permitted other
than lubricating oil is water.
Page 173 of 213
AMA / FIM NORTH AMERICA ROAD RACING
FUEL SAMPLE DECLARATION FORM
DATE FUEL SAMPLES TAKEN
FOR LAB ANALYSIS
….. /….. / …..
RIDER N°:
Sample Can "A"
______________________
Can Label N°
SESSION:
Can Seal N°
Sample Can "B"
______________________
Can Label N°
RIDER NAME:
Can Seal N°
Sample Can "C"
______________________
Can Label N°
Can Seal N°
MOTORCYCLE MAKE: _______________________________
TEAM: ____________________________________________
The above listed details refer to fuel samples taken from the fuel
tank of the motorcycle specified after the race while in the Check
Area for a period of 60 minutes pending any protest.
Sample "A" and "B" will go to the laboratory appointed by the
AMA/FIM North America for analysis. Sample "B" will be kept by
the laboratory staff as a retained sample in case of a dispute.
Sample "C" will be safeguarded by the AMA/FIMNA in case of
protests and/or counter-expertise is required.
As a responsible member of the team named on this sheet, I,
(print Name):
___________________________________
have controlled the serial numbers of can seals and serial
numbers of can labels and hereby certify the accuracy of the
listed information.
Time:
Signature: ___________________________
Team Position:
____________________________________
(OWNER/MANAGER/MECHANIC)
Page 174 of 213
2.10
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND HELMETS
2.10.1
Riders must wear a complete leather suit with
additional leather padding or other protection on the
principal contact points, knees, elbows, musters, hips
etc.
2.10.2
Linings or undergarments must not be made of a
synthetic material which might melt and cause
damage to the riders' skin.
2.10.3
Riders must also wear leather gloves and boots, which
with the leather suit provide complete coverage from
the neck down.
2.10.4
Leather substitute materials may be used, providing
they have been checked by the MotoAmerica
Technical Director.
2.10.5
Use of a back protector is highly recommended.
2.10.6
Riders must wear a helmet which is in good condition,
provides a good fit and is properly fastened.
2.10.7
Helmets must be of the full face type (integral) and
conform to one of the recognized international
standards:
• Europe ECE 22-05 ‘P’
• Japan
• USA
JIS T 8133:
SNELL M 2010
2.10.8
All helmets used by season riders in competition
must be equipped with either a manufacture
installed emergency cheek pad removal system or
an Eject emergency helmet removal system.
Single event riders will be granted a one race
exemption from this requirement, however, on
their second event weekend the device will be
required if the helmet manufacture does not have
an incorporated emergency cheek pad removal
device. If used, riders will be responsible for
ensuring that the Eject device is properly installed
and operable during all on-track activities. The
inflation tube must exit at the left chin bar. Riders
must attach the provided Eject logo installed on
the helmet's left chin bar. Helmets with a
manufacture installed emergency cheek pad
removal system must have either manufacture
labeling on both chin bars or labeling provided
MotoAmerica.
2.10.9
Visors must be made of a shatterproof material.
2.10.10
Disposable "tear-offs" are permitted.
2.10.11
The riders clothing must include their name,
emergency contact, and blood type adhered to the leftside lining adjacent to the main zipper.
Page 175 of 213
2.10.12
Any question concerning the suitability or condition of
the riders clothing and/or helmet shall be decided by
the MotoAmerica Technical Director, who may, if he
so wishes, consult with the manufacturers of the
product before making a final decision.
Page 176 of 213
2.11
PROCEDURES FOR TECHNICAL CONTROL
A rider is at all times responsible for his motorcycle.
2.11.1
At each circuit the Technical Checking Area consisting
of the parc fermé and the inspection area must be
clearly defined:
a. Parc fermé
The parc fermé is a restricted access area sealed with
fences or other physical divisions with one or more
gates.
The gates and the area are under the control of
marshals when the parc fermé is in use (e.g. after
practice/race).
The parc fermé area must be sufficiently large to give
shelter to all participating motorcycles.
The only persons allowed to enter the parc fermé are
the:
• MotoAmerica Technical Director and Technical
Staff
• Race Direction Members
• FIMNA Stewards
• Tire Manufacturer’s staff
• Riders and Team Managers of motorcycles staying
in the parc fermé
• Up to 3 Team Mechanics until dismissed by the
technical stewards
No other persons have the right to enter and stay in
the parc fermé unless invited by the MotoAmerica
Technical Director.
b. Inspection area
The inspection area is a sensitive area where
motorcycles are disassembled and inspected and
technical meetings are held. Therefore, the inspection
area is highly restricted.
The following persons are allowed to remain in the
inspection area:
• The MotoAmerica Technical Director and Technical
Staff
• The Race Direction Members
• The FIMNA Stewards
• The riders, team managers or their representatives
of the inspected motorcycles
• For disassembling operations, up to 3 mechanics
per motorcycle may be present
Any other persons may enter or stay in the inspection
area at the sole discretion of the MotoAmerica
Page 177 of 213
Technical Director. In case of an engine inspection,
the inspected entrant has the right to request a
reserved area where other entrants cannot watch
closely.
In the inspection areas, under the control of the
Technical Manager and the supervision of the
MotoAmerica Technical Director, suitable equipment
will be installed to conduct the various tests, e.g.
1. Equipment for measuring the noise of the
motorcycle
2. Weighing scales with check weights for calibration
purposes
3. Instruments for measuring engine capacity
4. Rulers and degree discs and gauges for measuring
other dimensions
2.11.2
The technical control procedure will be carried out in
accordance with the schedule set out in these
Regulations. The Technical Stewards must be
available throughout the event to check motorcycles
and equipment as required by the MotoAmerica
Technical Director.
2.11.3
Presentation of a motorcycle will be deemed as an
implicit statement of conformity with the technical
regulations. A rider's presence at the technical control
is not mandatory.
2.11.4
The motorcycle will be inspected under the name of
the rider.
2.11.5
For each motorcycle the Technical Stewards will
prepare a technical control card on to which will be
recorded, amongst other information, the team
presenting the motorcycle and the rider.
2.11.6
The Technical Stewards must inspect the motorcycle
for obvious safety omissions and the MotoAmerica
Technical Director may, at his discretion, choose to
check the motorcycles for technical compliance with
all other aspects of these Regulations.
2.11.7
The MotoAmerica Technical Director will refuse any
motorcycle that does not have a correctly-positioned
positive transponder attachment. The transponder
must be fixed to the motorcycle in the position and
orientation as shown in the Timekeeping information
given to teams pre-season and available at each
event. Positive attachment of the transponder bracket
consists of a minimum of tie-wraps, but preferably by
screw or rivet. Velcro or adhesive alone will not be
accepted. The transponder retaining clip must also
be secured by a tie-wrap.
Page 178 of 213
2.11.8
At the conclusion of the check, the Technical Stewards
will place a small sticker on the motorcycle indicating
that it has passed the safety checks.
2.11.9
The Technical Manager will prepare a report on the
results of technical control which, will be submitted to
the Event Management Committee via the
MotoAmerica Technical Director.
2.11.10
The Technical Stewards must re-inspect any
motorcycle that has been involved in an accident. This
would normally be carried out at the inspection area.
2.11.11
The Technical Stewards must be available, based on
instructions from the MotoAmerica Technical Director,
to re-inspect any motorcycle for technical compliance
during the meeting or after the race and to supervise
inspection of a motorcycle following a protest on a
technical matter.
2.11.12
At the end of Superpole and qualifying, the Technical
Manager will ensure that the classified motorcycles
are placed in the parc fermé for a period of at least 30
minutes after the end of the session.
At the end of the races, the Technical Manager will
ensure that all classified motorcycles are placed in the
parc fermé for a period of at least 30 minutes from the
end of the race (unless held longer at the discretion of
the Technical Director) with the following exception;
Competitors must retrieve their motorcycles within
approximately 30 minutes after the motorcycle entered
the parc fermé, except for those motorcycles chosen
for disassembly. After this time limit, the parc fermé
officials will no longer be responsible for the
motorcycles left behind.
2.11.13
The MotoAmerica Technical Director may require a
team to provide such parts or samples as he may
deem necessary.
2.11.14
If a motorcycle is involved in an accident, the
MotoAmerica Technical Director or his appointed staff
must check the motorcycle to ensure that no defect of
a serious nature has occurred. However, it is the
responsibility of the rider or the team to present his
motorcycle for this re-examination together with
helmet and clothing.
If the helmet is clearly defective, the Technical
Manager must arrange to retain this helmet. The
Medical Director must send this helmet, together with
the accident and medical report (and pictures and
video, if available) to the AMA/ FIMNA and/or the
Federation of the rider.
2.11.15
Noise may be checked after Superpole as well as after
the race. Noise may be checked at any time of the
event by request of the MotoAmerica Technical
Director. On request of rider, team or mechanic, noise
Page 179 of 213
of their own motorcycles can be checked at any time
during the event.
2.11.16
The random weight check during practices will be held
with minimum disturbance to the riders.
The MotoAmerica Technical Director has the final
authority in case of a dispute on the conformity of the
parts in question and for their acceptance.
Page 180 of 213
2.12
VERIFICATION GUIDELINES FOR TECHNICAL
STEWARDS
2.12.1
Verification for the classes
Make sure all necessary measures and administrative
equipment are in place at least 1 hour before the
Technical control is due to open.
Decide who is doing what and note decisions.
"Efficiency" must be the watchword. Always keep
cheerful and remember the reasons for Technical
controls: SAFETY AND FAIRNESS.
Be well informed. Make sure MotoAmerica has
supplied you with all technical "updates" that may have
been issued subsequent to the printing of the
Technical Regulations. Copies of all homologation
documents must be in your possession.
Inspection must take place under cover with a large
enough area (min. surface 100 sq. meters).
Weighing apparatus must be accurate and practical.
The scale must be certified in the current year.
Rules regarding noise level and measurement must
be respected.
The scales and noise meter will be available to the
teams or riders for pre-race checking in the technical
control area.
2.12.2
General Verification Guidelines
The motorcycles will not be required for weight and/or
noise check at the pre-race technical inspection.
Noise test must take place in a clear area adjacent to
the Technical control at least 5 meters from any
possible noise reflecting obstruction.
The riders and teams must be aware that the weight
and noise may be checked at random during practice
in the pit-lane, at the end of Superpole and at the end
of each race.
Claiming that the noise and weight were not officially
controlled before the race will not be grounds for
appeal. Conformity of the rules is the responsibility of
the rider and the team (or of the participants).
The MotoAmerica Technical Director reserves the
right to spot check the weight and noise of any
motorcycles on pit row during free practice and official
practice. This can occur at any time during the free
practice and in the first forty minutes of any official
(timed) practice. This will be carried out with the least
possible inconvenience to the rider or the team.
Motorcycles arriving later than the first free practice
must be controlled in the technical control area.
Page 181 of 213
At the conclusion of the inspections, a small sticker or
colored mark will be placed on the motorcycle
indicating that the motorcycle had passed inspection.
The MotoAmerica Technical Director/Technical
Manager must re-inspect any motorcycle that has
been involved in an accident.
The Technical Stewards must be available, based on
instructions from the MotoAmerica Technical Director
or the Technical Manager, to re-inspect any
motorcycle for compliance during the meeting.
2.12.3
Dry Superpole
Each motorcycle which completed the Superpole may
be checked.
The minimum checks are weight and noise.
The MotoAmerica Technical Director may request
other checks.
2.12.4
Superbike/STK 1000 Race 1
The first five motorcycles plus one at random from six
through fifteen can be checked for the following
compliance points:
 Weight: The weight will be checked in the condition
that the motorcycle has finished the race. No
elements can be added to the motorcycle neither
fuel, oil, water nor tires.
 Noise.
 Throttle bodies / injection: Homologation points.
 The MotoAmerica Technical Director may request
other checks.
2.12.5
Superbike/STK 1000 Race 2
The first ten motorcycles plus one at random from
eleven through fifteen can be checked for the following
compliance points:
 Weight: The weight will be checked in the condition
that the motorcycle has finished the race. No
elements can be added to the motorcycle neither
fuel, oil, water nor tires.
 Noise.
 Throttle bodies/injection: Measurement and
inspection of both inlet and outlet tract.
(Homologation points)
 Engine: Any engine, chosen at random, can be
checked internally for capacity and compliance with
the regulations.
The random choice can be determined by the finishing
positions selected prior to the race by the Technical
Manager. The MotoAmerica Technical Director may at
Page 182 of 213
his absolute discretion require the control of any
additional motorcycle and other checks.
The MotoAmerica Technical Director may require a
team to provide parts or samples, as he may deem
necessary to confirm compliance with the rules.
The MotoAmerica Technical Director may request
other checks.
2.12.6
Supersport & Superstock 600 Races
The first ten motorcycles plus one at random from
eleven through fifteen can be checked for the following
compliance points:
 Weight: The weight will be checked in the condition
that the motorcycle has finished the race. No
elements can be added to the motorcycle neither
fuel, oil, water nor tires.
 Noise.
 Throttle bodies /injection:
Measurement and
inspection of both inlet and outlet tract.
 Engine: One engine and up to a maximum of three
engines, chosen at random, can be checked
internally for capacity, cams, valve size, timing, etc.
 Tire, air box and electric starter – compliance.
The random choice can be determined by the finishing
positions selected prior to the race by the Technical
Manager. The MotoAmerica Technical Director may at
his absolute discretion require the control of any
additional motorcycle and other checks.
2.12.7
Timetable
The Technical Stewards must be present and
available during the opening hours of the Technical
control area. The MotoAmerica Technical Director and
the Technical Manager will instruct the Technical
Stewards to verify motorcycles for compliance with
technical and safety rules.
See final instructions for event specific timetable.
2.12.8
Equipment list
 Revolution meter
 Sound meter and calibrator
 Slide caliper
 Depth gauge
 Steel measuring tape
 Seals
 Weighing
weights
apparatus
(scales) with calibration
 Tools for measuring engine capacity
Page 183 of 213
 Tools for measuring valve lift
 Weighing apparatus for investigation of valve
weights
 Color for marking parts
 Magnet for materials testing
 Computer with Homologation Documents
2.12.9
Document list
 Regulations of the CURRENT year.
 Homologation documents
 Homologations Information
 Technical control forms
 Writing materials
Page 184 of 213
2.13
SOUND LEVEL CONTROL
Sound limits in force:
The maximum sound level shall be measured at a
mean piston speed of 11 m/sec. The fixed RPM
specified in Art. 2.13.5 may be used.
2.13.1
With the microphone placed at 50 cm from the exhaust
pipe at an angle of 45° measured from the center-line
of the exhaust end and at the height of the exhaust
pipe, but at least 20 cm above the ground. If this is not
possible, the measurement can be taken at 45°
upwards.
2.13.2
During a sound test, motorcycles not equipped with a
gear-box neutral must be placed on a stand.
2.13.3
The silencers will be marked when they are checked
and it is not allowed to change them after the
verification, except for any spare silencer which has
also been checked and marked.
2.13.4
The rider shall keep his engine running out of gear and
shall increase the engine speed until it reaches the
specified
Revolutions
Per
Minute
(RPM).
Measurements must be taken when the specified
RPM is reached.
2.13.5
Noise control
Due to the similarity of the piston stroke in different
engine configurations within the capacity classes, the
noise test will be conducted at a fixed RPM. For
reference only, the mean piston speed at which the
noise test is conducted is calculated at 11 m/sec.
2 cylinder
3 cylinder
4 cylinder
600cc
5,500 RPM
6,500 RPM
7,000 RPM
750cc
5,500 RPM
6,000 RPM
7,000 RPM
>750cc
5,000 RPM
5,000 RPM
5,500 RPM
The maximum sound level for engines with more than
one cylinder will be measured on each exhaust end.
A motorcycle which does not comply with the
maximum sound limits may be presented several
times at pre-race control.
The surrounding sound must not exceed 90 dB/A
within a 5 meters radius from the power source during
tests.
Apparatus for noise control must be to international
standard IEC 651, Type 1.
The sound level meter must be equipped with a
calibrator for control and adjustment of the meter
during periods of use.
Page 185 of 213
The "slow response" setting must always be used.
2.13.6
Sound control after the competition
In a competition which requires a final examination of
motorcycles before the results are announced, this
examination must include a sound control
measurement of at least the first three motorcycles
listed in the final classification. At this final test, there
will be a 3 dB/A tolerance.
2.13.7
Noise control during a competition
In a competition which requires noise control tests
during the event, motorcycles must comply with the
noise limits without tolerance.
2.13.8
Guidelines for use of Sound Level Meters
The Technical Stewards must arrive in sufficient time
for discussions with the MotoAmerica Technical
Director and other Technical Stewards in order that a
suitable test site and testing policy can be agreed.
Sound level measuring equipment must include a
compatible calibrator, which must be used
immediately before testing begins and always just
prior to a re-test if a disciplinary sanction may be
imposed.
Two sets of equipment must be available in case of
failure of tachometer, sound level meter or calibrator
during technical control.
Tests may take place in rain or excessively damp
conditions. Motorcycles considered excessively noisy
must be individually tested if conditions allow.
In other than moderate wind, motorcycles must face
forward in the wind direction. (Mechanical noise will
blow forward, away from microphone).
'Slow' meter response must be used.
'A' weighted setting on sound level meter.
No rounding down of the meter reading, that is:
110.9 dB/A = 110.9 dB/A.
2.13.9
Corrections
Type 1 meter: deduct 1 dB/A
2.13.10
Precision of the method (tolerances)
All corrections are accumulative. Action and decisions
will depend on the Sporting Discipline concerned, and
decisions taken during prior discussions with the
MotoAmerica Technical Director.
Page 186 of 213
2.14
APPROVED NUMBER FONTS
Page 187 of 213
2.15
HOMOLOGATION
2.15.1
MotoAmerica homologation procedures will follow
the requirements of the FIM Homologation Rules
for Superbike, Superstock and Supersport.
2.15.2
The FIM Supersport category
applicable to Superstock 600.
2.15.3
For the complete homologation rule go to:
will also
be
www.fim-live.com/en/library/download/60181/no_cache/1/
2.15.4
Period
a. Once a motorcycle has obtained the
homologation, it may be used for racing in the
corresponding class for a maximum period of:
1. Superbike and Superstock 1000: 8 years
2. Supersport 600: 8 years
or until such time that the homologated
motorcycle no longer complies with the
technical rules.
b. A homologation will be granted only if the fee
has been paid.
c. The Manufacturer of the homologated model can
request an extension of a homologation before
the end of the 8-year homologation period. The
FIM may grant a 2-year extension of the
homologation
period.
All
Homologation
documents must be updated to the latest
standard but no fee will be charged for a
homologation extension.
Page 188 of 213
DISCIPLINARY AND ARBITRATION CODE
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
DISCIPLINARY & ARBITRATION CODE
PRINCIPALS
PENALTIES
DISCIPLINARY & ARBITRATION BODIES
PROTESTS & APPEALS
DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURES
COSTS OF PROCEDURE
LAW OF MERCY
ARBITRATION CLAUSE
Page 189 of 213
189
189
189
190
192
196
197
198
198
3.0
DISCIPLINARY AND ARBITRATION CODE
3.1
PRINCIPLES
The obligations incumbent upon the participants,
officials and organizers are set out in these
Regulations. Violations or non-observance of these
obligations will be subject to the penalties laid down in
this chapter.
3.2
PENALTIES
The penalties are:
 warnings
 fines
 penalty points
 drop of position
 ride through
 time penalties
 grid penalty
 disqualification
 points loss (withdrawal of Championship points)
 suspension
 exclusion
3.2.1
Definition and application of penalties
Warnings:
Can be made privately or publicly.
Penalty points:
May be imposed by Race Direction on a
rider in any number from 1 to 10, points
are cumulative and expire after a period
of 365 days from the date they were
imposed. Automatic sanctions apply to
a rider accumulating points as follows:
 4 Points - Start the next race from last
grid position.
 7 Points - Start the next race from pit
lane.
 10 Points - Disqualification from
participation at the next event (or from
the race results if this occurs at the last
event of the season). Points re-set to 0
after a rider reaches 10 points and
serves a serves a disqualification.
Fines:
Cash penalty up to 10,000 USD
Drop of
Position:
The rider must go back the number of
positions decided by the Race Direction.
Ride through:
See Art. 1.22
Page 190 of 213
Time penalties:
The imposition of time affecting the
rider's actual result up to 2 minutes and
the cancellation of time.
Grid penalty:
The imposition of a drop of any number
of grid position at the rider’s next race.
Disqualification:
Disqualification from an event, practice
sessions (black flag, black flag with
orange disc), race (black flag, black flag
with orange disc) or from its results.
Points loss:
The loss of points from
Championship races already run.
Suspension:
The loss of rights to participate in the
Championship may be applied to one or
more races.
Exclusion:
The final and complete loss of all rights
of participation in any activity under
FIMNA or AMA control.
3.2.2
the
Plurality of Penalties
Any offender may have several penalties pronounced
against him according to the circumstances.
3.3
THE DISCIPLINARY AND ARBITRATION BODIES
The disciplinary and arbitration bodies of FIM North
America, qualified to deal with disciplinary and
arbitration matters, are:
 The Race Direction
 The FIM North America Stewards
 The Permanent Bureau
 The Court of Arbitration for Sports (CAS)
3.3.1
The Race Direction
3.3.1.1
Composition
The Constitution of the Race Direction is in
accordance with the requirements laid down in Article
1.6.
3.3.1.2
Authority and Competence
The Race Direction has the authority to penalize
riders, teams’ personnel, officials, promoters,
organizers and all the persons involved in any capacity
whatsoever in an event or in the Championship for
infringements of the Regulations, including the
following:
 Any voluntary or involuntary action or deed
accomplished by a person or a group of persons
Page 191 of 213
during a meeting, contrary to the current regulations
or instructions given by an official of the meeting.
 Any corrupt or fraudulent act, or any action
prejudicial to the interests of the meetings or of the
sport, carried out by a person or a group of persons
occurring during an event.
 Having been unable to ensure the smooth and
efficient running of the event or for serious breaches
of the Regulations.
The Race Direction is competent to adjudicate upon a
protest relating to infringements of the regulations.
3.3.1.3
Penalties that may be pronounced by the Race
Direction
The following penalties may be pronounced by the
Race Direction:
 penalty points
 warnings
 fines
 drop of position
 ride through
 time penalties
 grid penalty
 disqualification
 points loss (withdrawal of Championship points)
 suspension
3.3.2
The FIM Stewards Panel
3.3.2.1
Composition
The Composition of the FIMNA Stewards Panel is in
accordance with the requirements laid down in Article
1.7.
3.3.2.2
Competence
The FIM North America Stewards Panel will hear any
appeals against decisions taken by the Race
Direction.
3.3.2.3
Penalties that may be pronounced by the FIMNA
Stewards Panel only following an appeal:
 fines
 warnings
 time penalties
 grid penalty
 disqualification
 points loss (withdrawal of Championship points)
 suspension
Page 192 of 213
3.4
PROTESTS AND APPEALS
3.4.1
Right of protest
Any legal entity or any individual, rider, team,
manufacturer, official etc. affected by a decision taken
under the authority of FIMNA, has the right to protest
against that decision.
No protest may be lodged against a decision of the
Race Direction entailing:
 a drop of position.
 a ride through.
 a disqualification from the practice sessions or
races by means of a black flag or black flag with
orange disc.
 a fine for speeding in the pit lane.
 a photo finish.
3.4.2
Right of appeal to the FIM North America Stewards
against a decision of the Race Direction
No appeal may be lodged against a decision entailing
or not:
 a drop of position.
 a ride through.
 a disqualification from the practice sessions or
races by means of a black flag or black flag with
orange disc.
 a fine for speeding in the pit lane.
 a photo finish.
When no appeal may be lodged the decision of the
Race Direction is final.
3.4.3
Right of appeal to the MotoAmerica Permanent
Bureau against a decision of the FIM North
America Stewards
No appeal may be lodged if the FIM North America
Stewards confirm the previous decision of the Race
Direction. In this case, the decision of the FIM North
America Stewards is final.
3.4.4
Right of appeal to the Court of Arbitration for Sport
(CAS) against a decision of the MotoAmerica
Permanent Bureau
No appeal may be lodged against a decision entailing
or not:
• a drop of position.
• a ride through.
• a disqualification from the practice sessions or
races by means of a black flag or black flag with
orange disc.
Page 193 of 213
• a fine for speeding in the pit lane.
• a photo finish.
The decision of the CAS is final.
3.4.5
All rules herein may be appealed in accordance
with the procedure stated in the MotoAmerica AMA
Road Racing Series FIM North America
Championship Regulations except for those rules
that the regulations specify may not be appealed.
The participants recognize the need for officials to
make decisions that require judgment and the
exercise of discretion, often instantaneously, with
events as they are occurring. The exercise of
judgment by the officials during an event with
respect to any penalty or lack of penalty shall only
be appealable in accordance with the regulations.
By submitting an application to participate in an
AMA FIM North America sanctioned MotoAmerica
event, and in consideration of receiving the
numerous benefits available, each participant
agrees that the final and binding decisions of the
officials are non-litigable, and shall not be
appealable to any court or other tribunal other than
the AMA or FIM North America. The participants to
any protest or appeal further agree that the protest
and appeal procedures provided for in the
MotoAmerica AMA Road Racing Series FIM North
America Championship Regulations are the
exclusive remedy for the resolution of any disputes
and renounce the right to, and shall not pursue,
recourse to any arbitrator, court or other tribunal
not provided for in the MotoAmerica AMA Road
Racing Series FIM North America Championship
Regulations. No court action of any kind may be
taken by any participant.
By reason of
participation in an event, each participant waives
any rights such participant may otherwise have to
be a party to or take any action in court seeking
legal or equitable relief against any decision, lack
of decision or action of any kind by the officials or
anyone acting on their behalf or the appeal panel.
Each participant acknowledges that participation
in an event by other participants is, in part, on
reliance on this waiver. If a participant initiates or
participates in litigation in violation of this rule, all
participant
privileges
may thereupon be
suspended and subject to disciplinary action
deemed warranted by the AMA or FIM North
America.
3.4.6
Procedure and time limit for protests
All protests must be submitted and signed only by the
person directly concerned. Each protest must refer to
a single subject only and the intention to protest must
be notified to Race Direction within 30 minutes of the
publication of the results.
Page 194 of 213
The protest must then be confirmed in writing or
withdrawn within one (1) hour at the latest after the
publication of the results.
Protests must be handed to a responsible official
(Race Director or any member of Race Direction)
together with the security deposit of 750 USD or
equivalent.
Teams and riders contracted to compete in the
Championship may submit a letter of guarantee from
MotoAmerica in lieu of payment.
A protest against the eligibility of a rider, team or a
motorcycle to enter a class or event must be made
before the start of the official practice.
A protest against a machine on technical control
compliance grounds (eg. weight, noise, materials,
etc.) may be made after the start of official practice.
Following race one of a double header that takes place
on the same day, the intention to protest other riders
for technical reasons must be submitted within 15
minutes of the end of the race. For sporting protests
the time limits remain as above.
3.4.7
Hearing of a protest
After a hearing, the Race Direction must make a
decision on any protest presented. The protest has to
be judged according to the provisions of the
Regulations.
3.4.8
Effect of the decision upon a protest
The decision of the Race Direction and determination
of penalty is immediate.
3.4.9
Time limits for the lodging of an appeal
The time limit for lodging a statement of appeal is:
against a decision of the
Race Direction
30 minutes
against a decision of the FIM
North America Stewards
5 days
statement of appeal before
the CAS
5 days
The time limits shall be taken from the date and time
of receipt of the decision by the appellant.
3.4.10
Lodging of an appeal
To be admissible, the statement of appeal must be
submitted by letter, sent by registered letter, special
courier or email to FIM North America to be forwarded
to the MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau. It is the
Page 195 of 213
appellant’s responsibility to assure receipt of the
appeal within the time limits.
The correct security deposit for appeal must be
handed to FIM North America Chief Steward for an
appeal before the FIM Stewards or paid to FIM North
America for an appeal to the MotoAmerica Permanent
Bureau.
3.4.10.1 Security deposit for appeals
The amount of the security deposit is 1,500 USD.
Teams and riders contracted to compete in the
Championships may submit a letter of guarantee.
Within 10 days following the statement of appeal
before the MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau, the
appellant assigns to FIM North America a brief of
appeal stating the facts.
If the appeal was not lodged and/or the security
deposit for the appeal was not paid within the deadline
specified in article 3.4.8, the appeal will be declared
inadmissible without hearing.
3.4.10.2 Security deposit payable upon an adjournment
If an adjournment to call further witnesses is ordered
upon the request of one of the parties involved, this
party must provide an additional financial guarantee
within a time limit to be fixed by the disciplinary body.
The hearing will not be continued until this guarantee
has been paid. In case of no provision of the guarantee
within the time limit, the disciplinary body will make a
determination on the appeal based on the evidence of
the original witness.
3.4.10.3 Time limits to be observed for appeal hearings
The FIM North America Stewards must be convened
to examine an appeal immediately after the brief of
appeal is received.
The MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau must be
convened to examine an appeal not later than 6 weeks
after the brief of appeal is received. The FIM North
America Stewards must in all cases pronounce a
decision.
3.4.11
Effect of an appeal
On request of the appellant, the FIM North America
Stewards Panel may decide a stay of the provisional
execution adjudicated by the Race Direction by
injunction or in its decision.
On request of the appellant, the MotoAmerica
Permanent Bureau may decide a stay of the
provisional execution adjudicated by the FIM North
America Stewards Panel by injunction or in its
decision.
Page 196 of 213
3.5
PROCEDURE BEFORE ALL THE DISCIPLINARY
AND ARBITRATION BODIES
3.5.1
Right to a hearing
It shall be the unquestionable right of any person or
body charged with any offense under the Regulations
to defend themselves, either in person or by proxy.
Any party convened before a disciplinary or arbitration
body has the right to be represented by one defense
counsel of its own choice and at its own expense.
Adequate notice of this intention must be given in
order that this may also be notified to all other parties
in the case. Failure to do so may result in the
disciplinary or arbitration body upholding an objection
to such representation.
If any of the parties duly convened do not appear,
judgment can be rendered by default.
The disciplinary or arbitration bodies may decide that
the hearing take place by means of a telephone
conference call or through any other means of
communication using a telephone or electronic device.
Such a method of conducting a hearing shall only take
place with the consent of all parties involved.
3.5.2
The Hearing
The hearing shall be public unless the disciplinary or
arbitration body itself decides otherwise in exceptional
circumstances.
The hearing shall be conducted in English. Should one
of the parties wish to use another language, it shall
provide the necessary interpreters at its own expense.
The appellant must be present or duly represented,
failing which, the protest will not be admissible and the
costs shall be borne by the appellant.
Once the proceedings have begun, each of the parties
involved will state their respective cases without the
witnesses being present.
After statements of the parties concerned, the
disciplinary or arbitration body shall hear the various
witnesses and experts in order to complete the
evidence. The parties involved in the case shall have
the right to question all witnesses and experts on their
evidence.
Any member of the disciplinary or arbitration body
may, at any time during the hearing question any of
the parties involved, the witnesses and experts.
3.5.3
Witnesses and Experts
Each party is responsible for the convening and
appearance of its own witnesses, as well as their
expenses unless decided otherwise by the Court.
Page 197 of 213
The disciplinary or arbitration body has no authority to
oblige the witnesses to swear on oath; therefore,
testimony shall be given freely. The witnesses may
only testify to the facts they know and shall not be
allowed to express an opinion, unless the disciplinary
or arbitration body should regard them as experts on
a particular subject and should ask them to do so.
After having made their statements, the witnesses
may not leave the room and shall not be allowed to
speak to any other witness who has to give evidence.
The arbitration body may summon experts.
3.5.4
Judgment
Decisions of all disciplinary or arbitration bodies will be
reached by a simple majority of votes. All members will
have equal voting rights which must be exercised
when a decision is required. Abstention is not
permitted.
Each member of the disciplinary or arbitration body
binds himself to keep all deliberations secret.
3.5.5
Notification of Judgments
The decisions of the Race Direction or of the FIM
North America Stewards must be notified directly at
the event venue, or failing that, addressed by
registered letter with acknowledgement of receipt. All
judgments of the MotoAmerica Permanent Bureau
must be notified, in writing, by registered letter with
acknowledgement of receipt in order to inform all
parties concerned.
3.5.6
Publication of Judgments
The disciplinary or arbitration body imposing a penalty
or adjudicating a protest or an appeal must have its
findings published and quote the names of all parties
concerned. The persons or bodies quoted in these
statements have no right of action against FIM North
America nor against any person having published the
statement.
Furthermore, final decisions will be published in the
media center and in the AMA Magazine unless the
arbitration body itself decides otherwise.
3.6
COSTS OF PROCEDURE
The costs of a disciplinary or arbitration decision will
be assessed by the FIMNA and will be awarded
against the losing party, unless the arbitration body
decides otherwise.
3.6.1
Payment of fines and costs
If the penalty is definitive, all fines and costs must be
paid to FIM North America within 30 days of
notification of the judgment decision according to
Article 3.5.5. The person or body affected by the
Page 198 of 213
decision shall be automatically suspended from
participation in all FIM North America and AMA
activities, until such time as full payment has been
received.
3.7
LAW OF MERCY
FIM North America, after consultation with the
MotoAmerica Bureau may mitigate or completely
forgive the penalty of a person or group of persons
after having exhausted all the appeal procedures.
3.8
ARBITRATION CLAUSE
Final decisions made by the disciplinary bodies
(exception art. 3.4.4) may be submitted exclusively to
the Court of Arbitration for Sport by way of appeal
within the time limit as laid down in article 3.4.9, which
shall have exclusive authority to impose a definitive
settlement in accordance with the Code of Arbitration
applicable to sport.
Page 199 of 213
CIRCUIT STANDARDS
4.0
CIRCUIT STANDARDS
Circuit standards will be guided by the “FIM
STANDARDS FOR ROAD RACING CIRCUITS"
(SRRC).
Page 200 of 213
MEDICAL CODE
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
MEDICAL CODE
INTRODUCTION
MEDICAL PANEL
MEDICAL SERVICES
CHIEF MEDICAL OFFICER
CHIEF MEDICAL OFICER DUTIES
INJURED RIDER PROCEDURE
MEDICAL PERSONENEL & EQUIPMENT
MEDICAL CENTER
HOSPITALS
TRAINING
CONCUSSION POLICY
INTRAVENOUS HYDRATION
ALCOHOL POLICY
Page 201 of 213
201
201
201
201
202
202
203
203
206
207
208
208
211
211
5.0
MEDICAL CODE
5.1
INTRODUCTION
This Medical Code prescribes the Medical Service
available for the competitors and their teams during an
AMA FIM North America MotoAmerica event. The
intent of this Medical Code is to help insure that any
medical emergency can be met with all of the
necessary skilled resources and treatments to prevent
possible mortality and minimize morbidity. This
Medical Code is modeled after the FIM Road Racing
Medical Code.
5.2
MEDICAL PANEL
A Medical Panel shall be authorised by MotoAmerica
and comprise as a minimum the Series Chief Medical
Officer (Chairman), the Race Director and one
MotoAmerica representative. The Medical Panel will
set the conditions for the medical service at events.
5.3
MEDICAL SERVICES
The medical service at an event shall comprise of two
parts; the track medical service and the public medical
service.
a. The Track Medical Service (TMS) shall provide
medical cover and pre- hospital trauma care to
riders injured during the event. The TMS shall also
provide appropriate assistance to riders, officials
and other authorised persons injured or taken ill
during the event.
b. The venue operator shall provide a Public Medical
Service (PMS) for the public, contractors, guests
and all other visitors on-site. Personnel and
equipment for the PMS are strictly separate from
the TMS.
1. The PMS is not described in this code but shall
conform to any regulations or guidelines
published by the relevant authority and reflect the
size of crowd expected.
2. The co-ordinator of the Public Medical Service
shall be in direct contact with and answerable to
the Chief Medical Officer (CMO).
c. Only the CMO in conjunction with the Race Director
may make statements to any third party, other than
immediate relatives, about the condition of injured
riders.
d. The basic AMA FIM North America MotoAmerica
Medical Services will be comprised of:
1. Medical Intervention Vehicles
2. Advanced Life Support (ALS) Ambulances
3. Medical Center
Page 202 of 213
5.4
CHIEF MEDICAL OFFICER
The CMO shall be a Doctor with full, restriction-free,
registration and a licence to practice from the
jurisdiction in the state of the event. They shall hold
personal medical indemnity insurance and have
informed their insurer of their current practice.
The CMO is responsible to the Race Director.
The Series CMO and the Event CMO may be the
same person.
5.5
CHIEF MEDICAL OFFICER DUTIES
5.5.1
Chief Medical Officer Duties – Pre-Event
The pre-event duties of the CMO shall include as
follows:
a. The CMO shall have a list of appropriate hospitals
in the vicinity of the event with contact numbers and
details of specialist services.
b. At least thirty days prior to the event, the venue
operator shall contact all appropriate local hospitals
to give information concerning the event including
dates and times of practice and racing and
estimated size of crowd.
c. The above information shall be available, in writing,
to the Race Director prior to the first official practice
session of the event.
d. The CMO shall brief the medical centre, vehicle and
trackside medical staff to be fully prepared prior to
the start of the first practice session of the event.
e. The CMO in consultation with the Race Director is
responsible for the deployment of Doctors and
Paramedical staff alongside the circuit.
f. The CMO together with the Race Director shall
inspect the deployment of the Track Medical
Services approximately twenty minutes before the
start of track activities on each day of the event.
5.5.2
Chief Medical duties – During Event
The duties of the CMO during the event shall include
as follows:
a. The CMO shall have executive responsibility for all
medical services during the event.
b. The CMO, together with the Race Director, shall
prepare a list of injured riders.
c. The CMO shall ascertain whether riders fallen
during the event are fit, at his /her discretion. Riders
who fall in the first part of an interrupted race shall
be examined before the re-start. Any riders who fall
Page 203 of 213
during the event and who refuse a medical
examination shall be added to the list of unfit riders.
d. The CMO shall attend meetings of the Event
Management at the request of the Race Director.
e. The FIM North America Safety Officer is
responsible for all matters of safety and with the
agreement of the Race Director will take
responsibility for the investigation of any incident,
liaising with all concerned including the CMO.
5.5.3
Chief Medical Officer duties – Post Event
The post-event duties of the CMO shall include as
follows:
a. The CMO, together with the Race Director, shall
prepare a list of unfit riders.
b. The incident statistics form, prepared by Race
Control in conjunction with the CMO, must be
completed and presented at the final Event
Management meeting at the event.
c. The CMO shall ensure that a room, suitably private,
shall be made available for any drug testing that
may be requested.
d. The CMO shall inform the Race Director of the
condition of injured riders under his/her care, and
keep him updated in the period following the event.
e. No media statements will be made about the
condition of an injured rider without the express
agreement of the CMO and the Race Director.
5.6
PROCEDURE IN THE EVENT OF AN INJURED
RIDER
The management of an injured rider is under the
control of the CMO.
5.7
MEDICAL PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
The Medical Panel will set the conditions for the Track
Medical Service at events including numbers of
doctors and paramedics, number of medical cars and
ambulances. The Track Medical Service shall be
separate to the Public Medical Service.
a. Individual medical staff must be suitably clothed and
carry equipment for initiating resuscitation. Doctors
and Paramedics working trackside or in medical
cars must be identified by wearing a red safety
protection suit with the word DOCTOR or
PARAMEDIC written in red on the rear of the suit.
b. Supporting trackside staff including medical car
drivers and authorised trainee/assessing persons
must equivalent protective clothing suitably marked
with DRIVER or OBSERVER. The organizer may
provide protective clothing for the medical team.
Page 204 of 213
c. Ambulance personnel will be identified in the
uniform of the organization they are appointed by.
5.7.1
Medical Personnel
a. Doctors shall hold full, registration and a licence to
practice from the government agency that has
jurisdiction for the event location. They may not be
restricted to working within an approved practice
setting. Any other licence restriction must be
communicated to the Medical Panel and will be
considered on an individual basis. The doctors shall
also hold personal indemnity insurance and have
informed their insurer of their current practice.
b. Paramedics shall be registered as 'Paramedic' with
the government agency that has jurisdiction for the
event location. The Medical Panel may judge a
paramedic to be eligible on provision of evidence of
continuing education and maintenance of
standards. The paramedics shall have indemnity
insurance either in the form of a personal policy or
provided by the event organizer.
5.7.2
Vehicles
The number, type and track position of the vehicles will
be decided by the Medical Panel in conjunction with
the Race Director.
5.7.2.1
Medical Intervention Vehicle
a. This high performance vehicle will be staffed with a
local physician or paramedic, as well as a driver
familiar with the lay out of the course, all access
roads and gates. The Rapid Intervention Vehicle will
have radio communication with Race Control and
will be positioned so that a rapid response is
possible to any section of the track. It will be
equipped with advance trauma and airway
management equipment. This vehicle will be
deployed by the Race Director in the event of a Red
Flag during a session, supporting the trackside
ambulance in incidents that suspect;
 an unconscious rider
 a spinal injury
 a serious injury
 a rider requiring immobilization
stabilization before being moved
and/or
 a rescue needing longer than 3 minutes
 a need for medical intervention on the track
b. The role of the Medical Intervention Vehicle is to
provide the initial evaluation and triage as well
supporting the trackside ambulance paramedics
and EMTs, supplementing their capabilities with
advanced modalities. The Medical Intervention
Page 205 of 213
Vehicle will also follow the grid of riders for the
warm-up and first lap of each race.
c. Medical Equipment
 Portable oxygen supply
 Supraglotic, endotracheal intubation and
surgical airway equipment
 Suction equipment
 Manual ventilator
 Equipment for chest decompression
 Equipment for vascular access, infusion,
circulatory support and hemorrhage control.
 Blood pressure monitoring equipment
 Pulse oximeter
 Equipment to remove race suits and helmet
5.7.2.2
Medical Intervention Vehicle Grid Procedure
a. The Medical Intervention Vehicle should stage at Pit
Out when riders are released for their sighting lap.
When Pit Exit is closed for riders, the Medical
Intervention Vehicle will enter the track, taking a lap
and staging at the center of the track 2 rows behind
the last rider on the grid. At the start of the WarmUp lap, the Medical Intervention Vehicle will follow
at speed the grid of riders for that lap, repositioning
again in the center of the track 2 rows behind the
last gridded rider. With the start of the race, the
Medical Intervention Vehicle will follow at speed the
grid of riders, returning to Pit Out, at the completion
of the first lap.
b. In the event that a rider runs of course, and returns
behind the Medical Intervention Vehicle, the vehicle
will continue at same speed.
5.7.2.3
Advanced Life Support (ALS) Ambulance
a. There should be 1 paramedic and 1 EMT in each of
the trackside ambulances. Each ambulance will
have radio communication with Race Control. The
ambulances will be positioned per the individual
event medical plan requirements. These personnel
should be skilled in helmet removal, with/without an
Eject helmet removal system, supraglotic and
endotracheal airway management.
b. The Medical Service must have exclusive access at
any time to a minimum of two ambulances that are
registered as an ambulance with the appropriate
authorities and insured to transport casualties on
public roads.
c. Medical Equipment
 Portable oxygen supply
Page 206 of 213
 Supraglotic and endotracheal intubation
equipment
 Suction equipment
 Manual ventilator
 Equipment for vascular access, infusion,
circulatory support and hemorrhage control
 Blood pressure monitoring equipment
 Pulse oximeter
 Equipment to remove race suits and helmets
 Equipment to immobilize limbs and spine
 Stretcher
 Scoop Stretcher
 ECG monitor and defibrillator
5.7.2.4
Air Ambulance (Medical Helicopter)
a. A medical helicopter should be available and
capable of transporting an injured rider to a Level 1
Trauma Center. The helicopter should have a coldstart to arrival time of < 30 min. The helicopter
should be staffed by one Flight Nurse, one Flight
Paramedic and one pilot. It is equipped to manage
advanced cardiac and trauma resuscitation. The
helicopter may be IFR rated, but may be limited by
a 1000ft minimum ceiling. The helipad should be
positioned in a secure area where aircraft prop
wash will not have an effect on racing activities.
b. Medical Equipment
 Oxygen supply
 Supraglotic, endotracheal intubation and
surgical airway equipment
 Suction equipment
 Manual and automatic ventilator
 Equipment for chest decompression
 Equipment for vascular access, infusion,
circulatory support and hemorrhage control.
 Blood pressure monitoring equipment
 Pulse oximeter
 Stretcher
 ECG monitor and defibrillator
c. The Medical Panel will establish the circumstances
and procedures at each event for the summoning of
an Air Ambulance.
5.8
MEDICAL CENTER
a. The Medical Center should be staffed with a
physician and at least one assistant, (EMT,
paramedic or nurse). The Medical Center may be
Page 207 of 213
used in some cases to stabilize a critically injured
rider before transportation as well as treat minor
wound and orthopedic injuries as well as minor
illnesses. It may be a permanent or temporary
structure, ideally with an entrance for EMS that is
separate from the public.
b. Medical Center should be capable of basic;
 Burn treatment
 Wound treatment
 Fracture treatment
 General medical care
 Adult and pediatric resuscitation
c. The Medical Center will serve:
 Any injured rider
 Any team member/pit crew
 Any MotoAmerica personnel
 Spectators
5.9
HOSPITALS
a. A hospital network must be identified so as to
manage all potential spectrum of trauma utilizing
the services ranging from Level 1 to Level 3 Trauma
Center capabilities.
b. Each hospital as well as the helicopter service will
receive a fax notification of the upcoming event
seven days before the race. Confirmation of receipt
of these notifications will be retained by
MotoAmerica. MotoAmerica will also send to each
hospital and department confirmation of rider
insurance coverage so that there is no delay in care.
Maps will be available to these hospitals for officials,
team members, and family.
5.9.1
Level 3 Hospital Services
a. Services for a Level 3 hospital should include:
 Onsite Helipad.
 Emergency Medical Services
 Imaging capability
Ultrasound
with
X-ray,
CT,
and
 Available Specialist in General Surgery and
Orthopedics.
 Medical ICU
b. Transportation time by ground ambulance should
be within 30 minutes.
5.9.2
Level 1 Hospital Services
a. Services for a Level 1 hospital should include:
Page 208 of 213
 Onsite Helipad
 Emergency Medical Services
 Full imaging services with X ray, CT, MRI and
Ultrasound
 Medical ICU
 Trauma/Surgical ICU
b. Additional specialty services should include:
 Trauma Anesthesia, Surgery and General
Surgery
 Orthopedics
 Cardiology, Cardiothorasic and Vascular Surgery
 Neurosurgery/Spine
 Plastic Surgery
 Maxillofacial Surgery
 Internal Medicine
c. Transportation time by helicopter should be within
30 minutes.
d. There should also be an identified Pediatric Trauma
Center, with a transportation time of 30 minutes.
5.10
TRAINING
There will be a meeting prior to each day of the event.
These meetings will familiarize all members of the
Medical Team with the goals of MotoAmerica as well
as the philosophy of care. These meetings will review
with all members of the Medical Team helmet removal
and airway management in a suspected cervical
injury, and there will also be a review of basic
motorcycle racing mechanisms of injury and injury
types. Ninety second response times to any section of
the track will be the goal, striving for the highest level
of medical care for riders, regardless of severity, and
to minimize/eliminate unwanted outcomes.
5.11
CONCUSSION POLICY
a. Introduction
Concussion was defined by the “Consensus
Statement on Concussion in Sport, Zurich, 2012”,
and as used by the FIM, as a “complex
pathophysiological process affecting the brain,
induced by traumatic biomechanical forces”. This
simply means, an alteration in the way in which the
brain functions secondary to an impact to the brain,
either direct or indirect. This alteration occurs on a
cellular level, and is not observable with either a CT
or MRI scan of the brain. A loss of consciousness is
not a requirement for this condition, and up to 90%
of all concussions do not involve a loss of
consciousness. The alterations in brain function
Page 209 of 213
may be subtle or dramatic.
b. Signs and symptoms
Signs can be observed, and symptoms are reported
by the rider.
Clear signs are a Loss of Consciousness – LOC, a
profoundly unstable gait/walk – ataxia, confusion,
repetitive questioning indicating retrograde
amnesia or vomiting.
Common symptoms of a concussion may include
headache – the most common, nausea, “pressure
in head”, dizziness/balance problems, sensitivity to
light or sound, blurred/double vision, difficulty in
concentrating/remembering/focusing,
fatigue/drowsiness, confusion, sleep disturbances
and changes in emotion/irritability, as well as other
vaguer symptoms such as “not feeling right”.
Even impacts that are away from the head may
produce a concussive event, for example, loading
the spine axially.
Symptoms typically are self-limited to 7-10 days.
10-15% of the time this can be longer.
c. Criteria for Suspicion of a Concussion
1. Observation of Loss of Consciousness on CCTV
in Race Control, or the rider is slow to get up off
the ground.
2. Observation of profound ataxia/staggering,
unsteadiness, balance difficulty or falling again
after getting up.
3. Observed confusion or inability to communicate
by initial responding Medical Personnel or Corner
Marshals. (These personnel are asked to report
these signs only, and are not making a
diagnosis).
4. Observed vomiting.
5. Suspicion of the physician in the Medical Center.
6. Self-reporting of Symptoms of a Concussion.
d. Determination of a Concussion
Concussions do not effect brain tissue in the way
found in more significant Traumatic Brain Injury,
TBI. Therefore, there are not any detectable
changes on standard CT or MRI scans that can help
determine if a Concussion has occurred. These
scans however, are commonly used to detect the
presence of a more serious TBI, because
Concussion and these more serious head injuries
share many common signs and symptoms.
Currently MotoAmerica, and the FIM, use the Sport
Page 210 of 213
Concussion Assessment Tool, 3rd Edition - SCAT
3, with a Balance Error Scoring System - BESS to
confirm the presence of an alteration in brain
function that is consistent with a Concussion. For
2017, MotoAmerica will also use Vistibulo Occulo
Motor Screening – VOMS, with or without computer
aid. These tests, in combination, have excellent
sensitivity and very good specificity in detecting the
presence of a Concussion.
ImPACT neurocognitive testing, when used, is a
helpful tool in determining the level of continued
neurocognitive disability from a concussive injury
and rehabilitation strategy. It cannot be used as a
stand lone determinant for Return to Competition
e. Exclusion from Competition
When a concussion has been identified, a rider is
removed from competition and placed on the Unfit
Rider List.
f. Return to Competition
It is always important for riders to observe a
graduated increase in activity before returning to full
competition to help avoid persisted symptoms.
1. Complete mental and physical rest until all
symptoms have resolved. Usually 72hrs.
2. Light aerobic activity - walking.
3. Moderate aerobic activity – bicycling/swimming.
4. Strenuous aerobic activity – HR > 60% MPHR.
Preferably low impact.
5. Full Training – MX, FT, MTB
6. Return to full Competition
Symptoms should not recur as activity is advanced.
If symptoms do occur, then return to the next lower
level of activity for 24hrs and try to advance again.
If symptoms continue to occur, a head scan may be
needed to investigate further for a more serious
Traumatic Brain Injury.
g. Conclusion
The understanding and management of concussion
in athletes
is
rapidly evolving. Serious
consequences can occur from the mismanagement
of concussions, and it is important for all riders to
have a thorough understanding of this condition and
how it may potentially affect them. Since the
symptoms are mostly self-reported, this policy relies
heavily on self-implementation. The rider and their
teams need to honestly identify rider symptoms and
alert the Chief Medical Officer. Though an injury to
the brain is not externally apparent in a concussion,
Page 211 of 213
the need for the competent management of this
injury should be viewed equally as important as that
of a seriously broken bone or other serious injury.
5.12
INTRAVENOUS HYDRAYTION
a. At no time during the meet will a rider receive any
type of intravenous hydration unless such
hydration is deemed medically necessary by
medical personnel as a result of an emergency
medical situation (e.g. heat stroke) encountered
by a rider, during, or as a result of competing in
the meet.
b. Once a rider receives such hydration during the
meet, the rider will be permitted to compete only
after the CMO has deemed the rider safe and has
released them to continue in the meet.
5.13
ALCOHOL POLICY
The Alcohol Policy and testing procedures will follow
the FIM Alcohol Policy listed in the FIM Medical Code.
Page 212 of 213
6.0
ANTI-DOPING CODE
The regulations will be governed by the US AntiDoping Agency (USADA).
Page 213 of 213
7.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CODE
The regulations will
Environments Code.
be
guided
Page 214 of 213
by
the
FIM
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement